2010 chevrolet traverse owner manual m · 2010 chevrolet traverse owner manual m in brief ... ce...

2010 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-40Universal Remote System . . . . 5-47

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-37Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-15Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-22Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-27Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-32Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-53

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

2010 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M

Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-10

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-14Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1

Introduction iii

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GMEmblem, CHEVROLET, theCHEVROLET Emblem, areregistered trademarks, and thename Traverse is a trademark ofGeneral Motors Corporation.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division whereverit appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in the U.S.A.Part No. 25851642 A First Printing ©2009 General Motors Corporation. All rights Reserved.

iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage.This would not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message, gage,or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gage

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

vi Introduction

2 NOTES

In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Heated and VentilatedSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Sensing System for PassengerAirbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-16Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Driver Information Center(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 1-18

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Storage Compartments . . . . . . 1-19Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Performance and MaintenanceStabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-21Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

In Brief 1-3

A. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5 .

B. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑11.

C. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 .

D. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1 .

E. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7.

F. Air Vents on page 8‑12.

G. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 .

H. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑4.

I. Cruise Control on page 9‑30.

J. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2 .

K. Horn on page 5‑5.

L. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑22 or DriverInformation Center (DIC)(Without DIC Buttons) onpage 5‑28.

M. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 or Dual AutomaticClimate Control System onpage 8‑4 .

N. Shift Lever. See Shifting IntoPark on page 9‑19.

O. Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

P. Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑6 . Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Disable Button.See StabiliTrak System onpage 9‑27. Tow/Haul Mode onpage 9‑24 (If Equipped) .Power Liftgate. See Liftgate onpage 2‑9 (If Equipped).

Q. Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑9 .

R. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑3 .

S. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑15(If Equipped).

T. Glove Box on page 4‑1.

1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 feet) awayfrom the vehicle.

Press K to unlock the driver door.

Press K again within five secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

To open or close the liftgate, pressand hold& until the liftgatebegins to move.

PressL and release to locatethe vehicle.

PressL and hold for more thantwo seconds to sound thepanic alarm.

PressL again to cancel thepanic alarm.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

In Brief 1-5

Remote Vehicle Start

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press Q .

3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold/ untilthe parking lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain onas long as the engine is running.The doors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 .

Door LocksTo lock or unlock a door manually:. From the inside use the door

lock knob on the window sill.. From the outside turn the key

toward the front or rear of thevehicle, or press the Q or "button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Power Door Locks

On vehicles with power door locks,the controls are located on the frontdoors.

" (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

See Power Door Locks onpage 2‑7

LiftgateTo open the liftgate the vehicle mustbe in P (Park). Press the touchpadunder the liftgate handle. To closethe liftgate, use the pull cup or pullstrap as an aid.

1-6 In Brief

Power Liftgate

On vehicles with a power liftgate,the vehicle must be in P (Park) tooperate it.. Press and hold the liftgate

button& on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

. Press the liftgate button on thecenter console.

. Press the touchpad switch onthe outside liftgate handle.

For more information see Liftgateon page 2‑9 .

Windows

On vehicles with power windows,the switches are on the driver doorarmrest. Each passenger door has aswitch that controls only thatwindow.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

For more information, see PowerWindows on page 2‑20.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

1. Pull the handle under the seat tounlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

Try to move the seat to be sure it islocked in place.

Power Seats

A. Power Seat Adjustment Control

B. Reclining Seatbacks

C. Lumbar Adjustment

In Brief 1-7

Move the seat forward or rearwardby moving the control (A) forward orrearward.

Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the control (A) up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4 .

To raise or recline the seatback tiltthe top of the control (B) forward orrearward.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑7 .

Press the front or rear of thecontrol (C) to increase or decreaselumbar support.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑6 .

Second Row Seats

To access the third row, pull thesliding seat lever forward so that theseat cushion folds and the entireseat slides forward.

See Rear Seats on page 3‑10.

Third Row SeatsThe third row seats can be foldedforward or removed.

Pull up on the release lever locatedon the back of the seat and pushthe seatback forward.

For detailed procedures see ThirdRow Seats on page 3‑12.

1-8 In Brief

Heated Seats

Heated Front Seats

The heated seat controls arelocated on the center console. Theengine must be running tooperate them.

I: Press to turn on the heatedseatback.

J: Press to turn on or off theheated seat and seatback.

For more information see HeatedFront Seats on page 3‑9.

Heated and VentilatedSeatsOn vehicles with this feature, thecontrols are on the front doors nearthe handle.

H : Press to ventilate the seat.

z : Press to heat the seat.

For more information see Heatedand Ventilated Front Seats onpage 3‑10.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2.

Safety Belt

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑15.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑19.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑24.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑55.

In Brief 1-9

Sensing System forPassenger Airbag

United States

Canada

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certain

conditions. The driver airbag,seat-mounted side impact airbags,and roof-rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑40 for moreinformation.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on the driverdoor armrest.

1. Press (A) or (B) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad toadjust the mirror.

3. Press either (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.

1-10 In Brief

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.To fold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to the original position.

Interior Mirror

If equipped, a manual insiderearview mirror can be adjusted sothat the driver can see behind thevehicle more clearly. Hold the mirrorin the center to move it up or downand side to side. Use the day/nightadjustment to help prevent glarefrom the headlamps behind you.

Move the lever located at the baseof the mirror, to the right fornighttime use and to the left fordaytime use.

For vehicles with an automaticdimming rearview mirror, the mirrorwill move automatically to reducethe glare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight illuminates each time theignition is turned to start.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑19.

Steering WheelAdjustment

The adjustment lever is located onthe left side of the steering column.

1. Pull the lever down to adjust thesteering wheel.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown or backward or forwardinto a comfortable position.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

In Brief 1-11

Power Tilt Wheel

For vehicles with the power tilt andtelescope wheel, the control is onthe left side of the steering column.. Push the control up or down to

tilt the steering wheel upor down.

. Push the control forward orrearward to move the steeringwheel toward the front or rear ofthe vehicle.

See Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2 .

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps are located in theoverhead console and above therear seat passengers.

The dome lamps automaticallycome on when a door is opened,unless the dome lamp overridebutton is pressed in.

To manually turn them on, turn theinstrument panel brightness controlclockwise to the farthest position.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button isnext to the exterior lamps control.

E: Press the button in and thedome lamps remain off when a dooris opened. Press the button again toreturn it to the extended position sothat the dome lamps come on whena door is opened.

Reading Lamps

Press the button near each lamp toturn them on or off.

For more information, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6‑5.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑4.

1-12 In Brief

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel, to the leftof the steering wheel.

9 : Turns the automatic lightcontrol on or off.

AUTO : Automatic operation of theheadlamps at normal brightness andother exterior lamps.

;: Manual operation of the parkinglamps and other exterior lamps.

2: Manual operation of theheadlamps and other exteriorlamps.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1 .. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/

Automatic Headlamp System onpage 6‑3 .

. Delayed Headlamps onpage 6‑3 .

Windshield Wiper/WasherThe windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the left side of thesteering column.

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.

9 : Turns the wipers off.

In Brief 1-13

6 : Delays wiping cycle. Turn theband up for more frequent wipes ordown for less frequent wipes.

1 : Slow wipes.

2 : Fast wipes.

Windshield Washer

J : Press the button at the end ofthe turn signal/lane change lever tospray washer fluid on thewindshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5 .

Climate Controls

A. Fan Control

B. Temperature Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Air Conditioning

E. REAR (Rear Climate Control)

F. Air Recirculation

G. Rear Window Defogger

1-14 In Brief

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO

C. Defrost

D. Air Recirculation


F. Air Delivery Mode Control

G. Driver Side Temperature Control

H. Display

I. Power (On/Off)

J. Rear Window Defogger

K. Air Conditioning

L. PASS (Passenger)

M. Passenger Side TemperatureControl

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 or Dual AutomaticClimate Control System onpage 8‑4 (If Equipped). For moreinformation about the rear climatecontrol, see Rear Climate ControlSystem (Rear Climate Control Only)on page 8‑10 or Rear ClimateControl System (Rear Climate withRear Seat Audio) on page 8‑11.

In Brief 1-15

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port

O : Press to turn the system onand off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.

f : Select radio stations.

©¨ : Seek or scan stations.

4 : Change the display between theradio station frequency and thetime, if equipped. While the ignitionis off, press 4 to display the time.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7‑2.

Storing a Favorite Station

A maximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the sixsoftkeys located below the radiostation frequency tabs and by usingthe radio FAV button. Press FAV togo through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7.

1-16 In Brief

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date for theradio with CD, DVD, and USB Port:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, thenpressO , to turn the radio on.

2. Press G to display HR, MIN,MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,month, day, and year).

3. Press the pushbutton locatedunder any one of the labels to bechanged.

4. To increase or decrease the timeor date, turn f clockwise orcounter-clockwise.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for the vehicles specificaudio system, see Clock onpage 5‑9 .

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receiveXM programming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service that isbased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.XM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A fee is required to receivethe XM service. For moreinformation, contact XM at in theU.S. and Canada.

For more information refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑8.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput located on the radio faceplateand a USB port located in the centerconsole. External devices such asiPod®, laptop computers, MP3players, CD changers, USB storagedevice, etc. can be connected to theauxiliary port using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)input jack or the USB portdepending on the audio system.

See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑36.

Bluetooth®

The in-vehicle Bluetooth systemallows users with aBluetooth-enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio system,microphone and controls.

In Brief 1-17

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See Bluetooth on page 7‑48.

Steering Wheel Controls

w /x : Press to change favoriteradio stations, select tracks on aCD/DVD, or to navigate tracks orfolders on an iPod® or USB device.

bg : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withOnStar® or Bluetooth systems.

+ e − e : Increases or decreasesvolume.

c : Press to reject an incomingcall, or to end a call.

SRCE : Press to switch betweenthe radio, CD, and for vehicles with,DVD, front auxiliary, and rearauxiliary.

¨ : Press to seek the next radiostation, the next track or chapterwhile sourced to the CD or DVDslot, or to select tracks and folderson an iPod® or USB device.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑3.

Navigation SystemThe vehicle's navigation systemprovides detailed maps of mostmajor freeways and roadsthroughout the United States andCanada. After a destination hasbeen set, the system providesturn-by-turn instructions for reachingthe destination. In addition, thesystem can help locate a variety ofpoints of interest (POI), such asbanks, airports, restaurants,and more.

See the vehicle's Navigation Systemmanual for more information.

1-18 In Brief

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (With DICButtons)If available, the DIC displaysinformation about the vehicle. It alsodisplays warning messages if aproblem is detected.

To access the DIC, some vehicleshave buttons located on theinstrument panel.

V : Press to set or reset certainfunctions and to turn off oracknowledge messages on the DIC.

U : Press to customize the featuresettings on your vehicle. SeeVehicle Personalization (With DICButtons) on page 5‑40 for moreinformation.

T : Press to display the oil life,park assist on vehicles with thisfeature, units, tire pressure readingson vehicles with this feature, RKEtransmitter programming, andcompass calibration and zonesetting on vehicles with this feature.

3 : Press this button to displaythe odometer, trip odometers, fuelrange, average economy, timer, fuelused, and average speed.

Some vehicles do not have thebuttons shown, however some ofthe menus can be viewed by usingthe trip odometer reset stem.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)(With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑22or Driver Information Center (DIC)(Without DIC Buttons) onpage 5‑28.

Cruise Control

T : On/Off.

+ RES: Press to accelerate orresume speed.

SET– : Press to set speed ordecrease speed.

[ : Press to cancel cruise control.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑30.

In Brief 1-19

Storage Compartments

For vehicles with a second rowcenter console, open each area toaccess the storage compartmentinside.

Press the buttons (B, C) on the frontof the consoles to access the upperand lower storage areas.

Increase the storage area by foldingthe top of the console forward. Liftup on rear console handle (A) andpull forward.

See Floor Console Storage onpage 4‑2 .

Power OutletsThe vehicle may have fouraccessory power outlets which canbe used to plug in electricalequipment, such as a cellularphone.

The power outlets are located:. On the instrument panel below

the climate controls.. Under the center floor console

cupholder.. At the rear of the center floor

console.. In the rear cargo area.

To use the outlets, remove thecover.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

1-20 In Brief

SunroofThe ignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY to operate thesunroof and power sunshade. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑16

The switch to operate the frontsunroof is on the headliner abovethe rearview mirror.

Vent: Press the front or rear of theswitch to vent or close the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close:From the closed position, press andrelease the rear or front of theswitch to express-open orexpress-close the sunroof.

For more information see Sunroofon page 2‑23.

Performance andMaintenance

StabiliTrak®

The traction control system limitswheel spin and the StabiliTraksystem assists with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. Both systemsturn on automatically every time thevehicle is started.. To turn off the traction control

part of StabiliTrak, press andrelease 5 located on theinstrument panel below theclimate controls. F illuminatesand the appropriate DICmessage is displayed. SeeVehicle Messages on page 5‑31.

. The StabiliTrak systemremains on.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak System on page 9‑27

In Brief 1-21

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The Tire Pressure Monitor Systemalerts you when a significantreduction in pressure occurs in oneor more of your vehicle’s tires byilluminating the low tire pressurewarning light on the instrumentcluster. The warning light willremain on until the tire pressure iscorrected. The proper tire pressuresfor your vehicle are listed on theTire and Loading Information labellocated on the driver side centerpillar (B pillar). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

You may notice during coolerconditions that the low tire pressurewarning light will appear when thevehicle is first started and then turnoff as you drive. This may be anearly indicator that your tirepressures are getting low and thetires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

Note: The Tire Pressure MonitorSystem can alert you about low tirepressure, but it does not replacenormal monthly tire maintenance.It is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑43 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑44.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. The kit can be usedto seal small punctures in the treadarea of the tire.

See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit on page 10‑58 for completeoperating information.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

1-22 In Brief

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. If the vehicle has DriverInformation Center (DIC)buttons: Press the vehicleinformation button until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays.

If the vehicle does not haveDriver Information Center (DIC)buttons: The vehicle must be inP (Park) to access this display.Press the trip odometer resetstem until OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays.

3. If the vehicle has DriverInformation Center (DIC)buttons: Press and hold the set/reset button until 100% isdisplayed. Three chimes soundand the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message goes off.

If the vehicle does not haveDriver Information Center (DIC)buttons: Press and hold the tripodometer reset stem until OILLIFE REMAINING shows 100%.Three chimes sound and theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control, if equipped.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

In Brief 1-23

Roadside AssistanceProgram

Roadside Assistance

U.S.: 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872) TTY Users:1-888-889-2438 Canada:1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theChevrolet Roadside Assistanceprogram. This program providestechnically trained advisors who areavailable 24 hours a day, 365 daysa year, minor repair information ortowing arrangements.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar

If you have a current OnStarsubscription, press the OnStarbutton and the current GPS locationwill be sent to an OnStar Advisorwho will assess your problem,contact Roadside Assistance, andrelay exact location to get you thehelp you need.

Chevrolet Owner Center

The Chevrolet Owner Center isa complimentary service thatincludes online service reminders,vehicle maintenance tips, onlineowner manual, special privilegesand more.

Sign up today at:www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet.

OnStar®

OnStar® uses several innovativetechnologies and live advisors toprovide a wide range of safety,security, navigation, diagnostics,and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStaradvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to seeif you need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : This blue button connects youto a specially trained OnStar advisorto verify your account informationand to answer questions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar emergencyadvisors.

X : Push this button for hands-free,voice-activated calling and to givevoice commands for turn-by-turnnavigation.

Crisis Assist, Stolen VehicleAssistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,Remote Door Unlock, RoadsideAssistance, Turn-by-Turn Navigationand Hands-Free Calling areavailable on most vehicles.

1-24 In Brief

Not all OnStar services areavailable on all vehicles. For moreinformation see the OnStar Owner'sGuide or visit www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY1-877-248-2080, or pressQ tospeak with an OnStar advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar terms and conditionsincluded in the OnStar SubscriberInformation.

OnStar service cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. OnStar service alsocannot work unless the vehicle is ina place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar has hired for that

area has coverage, networkcapacity and reception when theservice is needed, and technologythat is compatible with the OnStarservice. Not all services areavailable everywhere, particularlyin remote or enclosed areas, or atall times.

The OnStar system can record andtransmit vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent toan OnStar call center whenQ is

pressed,] is pressed, or if theairbags or ACR system deploy.This information usually includesthe vehicle's GPS location and, inthe event of a crash, additionalinformation regarding the crash thatthe vehicle was involved in (e.g. thedirection from which the vehicle washit). When the virtual advisor featureof OnStar hands-free calling isused, the vehicle also sends OnStarthe vehicle's GPS location so theycan provide services where it islocated.

Location information about thevehicle is only available if the GPSsatellite signals are unobstructedand available.

The vehicle must have a workingelectrical system, includingadequate battery power, for theOnStar equipment to operate. Thereare other problems OnStar cannotcontrol that may prevent OnStarfrom providing OnStar service atany particular time or place. Someexamples are damage to importantparts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,tall buildings, tunnels, weather orwireless phone network congestion.

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interactwith OnStar hands-free calling.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 for more information.

In Brief 1-25

On some vehicles, the mute buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system may notbe functioning properly. PressQand request a vehicle diagnostic.If the light appears clear (no light isappearing), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.PressQ to confirm that the OnStarequipment is active.

1-26 In Brief

2 NOTES

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-13Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-14

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-19Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer/retailer or qualifiedlocksmith can use to make newkeys. Store this information in a safeplace, not in the vehicle.

See your dealer/retailer if areplacement key or additional keyis needed.

Notice: If you ever lock your keysin the vehicle, you may have todamage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

If you are locked out of the vehicle,call the Roadside AssistanceCenter. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑6.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industryand Science Canada.

Changes or modifications to thissystem by other than an authorizedservice facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance.

The transmitter may betoo far from the vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement”later in this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualifiedtechnician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to60 m (195 feet) away from thevehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.

With Remote Start and PowerLiftgate Shown, Without Similar

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, seeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2‑5for additional information.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theparking lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn soundswhen Q is pressed again withinfive seconds. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑40 for additionalinformation.

Pressing Q may arm the contenttheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑13.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockonly the driver door. If K is pressedagain within five seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.

If enabled through the DIC, theparking lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑40.


Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Anti-Theft AlarmSystem on page 2‑13.

& (Power Liftgate): Press andhold until the liftgate begins tomove to open or close the liftgate.The taillamps flash and a chimesounds to indicate when the liftgateis opening or closing.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The parkinglamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to activate the panicalarm. The parking lamps flash andthe horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is moved toON/RUN orL is pressed again.The ignition must be in LOCK/OFFfor the panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchasedand programmed through yourdealer/retailer. When thereplacement transmitter isprogrammed to this vehicle usingthe DIC, all remaining transmittersmust also be reprogrammed. Anylost or stolen transmitters will nolonger work once the newtransmitter is programmed. Eachvehicle can have up to eighttransmitters programmed to it. See“Relearn Remote Key” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) (With DICButtons) on page 5‑22 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) (WithoutDIC Buttons) on page 5‑28 forinstructions on how to programtransmitters to this vehicle.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted into thenotch on the side.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.


3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that starts theengine from outside of the vehicle.

/ (Remote Start): This button islocated on the RKE transmitter if thevehicle has remote start.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remotestart to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle could run out of fuel.

If the vehicle has the remote startfeature, the RKE transmitterfunctions have an increased rangeof operation. However, the rangemay be less while the vehicle isrunning.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2for additional information.

Starting the Engine UsingRemote Start

To start the vehicle:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.

3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold/ untilthe parking lamps flash. If thevehicle's lights can not be seen,press and hold/ for at leastfour seconds.

When the vehicle starts the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running.The doors will be locked and theclimate control system will operateautomatically if the vehicle has theautomatic system, or at the samesetting as when the vehicle was lastturned off.

If the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system and heatedseats, the heated seats turn onduring colder outside temperaturesand shut off when the key is turnedto ON/RUN. See Heated FrontSeats on page 3‑9 or Heated andVentilated Front Seats onpage 3‑10 for more information.

The rear window defogger andheated mirrors, if the vehicle hasthem, turn on during colder outsidetemperatures and turn off when thekey is turned to ON/RUN.


After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto the ON/RUN position to drive thevehicle.

If the vehicle is left running itautomatically shuts off after10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

Extending Engine Run Time

To extend the engine run time by10 minutes, repeat Steps 1 though 3while the engine is still running.The engine run time can only beextended if it is the first remote startsince the vehicle has been driven.Remote start can be extendedone time.

If the remote start procedure is usedagain before the first 10 minute timeframe has ended, the first10 minutes will immediately expireand the second 10 minute timeframe will start.

For example, if the lock button andthen the remote start buttons arepressed again after the vehicle has

been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowingthe engine to run for a total of15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts orremote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.

After the vehicle's engine has beenstarted two times using the remotestart button, the ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To manually shut off a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

Conditions in Which theRemote Start Will Not Work

The vehicle cannot be started usingthe remote start feature if the key isin the ignition, the hood is open, or ifthere is an emission control systemmalfunction.

The engine turns off during a remotestart if the coolant temperature getstoo high or if the oil pressuregets low.

Vehicles that have the remotevehicle start feature are shippedfrom the factory with the remotevehicle start system enabled.The system may be enabled ordisabled through the DIC if thevehicle has DIC buttons. See“REMOTE START” under VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑40 for additionalinformation. If the vehicle does nothave DIC buttons, see your dealer/retailer to enable or disable theremote start system.


Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock a door, use thekey from the outside or the doorlock from the inside.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches arelocated on the front doors.

" (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Remove the key fromthe ignition and press to lock thedoors.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door or theliftgate is open, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.


Pressing the power lock switchtwice or the lock button on theRKE transmitter twice will overridethe delayed locking feature andimmediately lock all the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmed byusing the Driver Information Center(DIC). See “DELAY DOOR LOCK”under Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5‑40.

Automatic Door LocksVehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable you toprogram the vehicle's power doorlocks. This feature can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization (With DICButtons) on page 5‑40 for moreinformation.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you fromlocking the key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and a frontdoor is open.

If the driver side power door lockswitch is pressed when the driver'sdoor is open and the key is in theignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.

If the passenger side power doorlock switch is pressed when thefront passenger door is open andthe key is in the ignition, all of thedoors will lock and then the frontpassenger door will unlock.

Safety LocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge ofeach door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot to thevertical position.


Doors

Liftgate

Manual Liftgate Operation

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.

To unlock the liftgate, use the powerdoor lock switch or press the doorunlock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmittertwice. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 .

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the underside of theliftgate handle. The vehicle must bein P (Park) to open the liftgate.To close the liftgate, use the pullcup or strap.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftgate will notopen. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connectedand has adequate voltage, and theliftgate still will not function, thevehicle should be taken to adealer/retailer for service.


Power Liftgate Operation

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.


(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.


The vehicle may have a powerliftgate. The vehicle must be inP (Park) to use this feature.

The taillamps will flash and a chimewill sound when the power liftgateis used.

{ WARNING

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.


The power liftgate can be poweropened and closed in thefollowing ways:. Press and hold the power liftgate

button on the RKE transmitteruntil the liftgate starts moving.

Power Liftgate Button onCenter Console

. Press the liftgate button on thecenter console.

. Press the touchpad switch onthe outside liftgate handle.

Pressing the buttons or touchpadswitch a second time while theliftgate is moving reverses thedirection.

Power Liftgate Button nearLiftgate Latch

The liftgate can also be closed bypressing the power liftgate buttonnext to the liftgate latch. Press thebutton a second time during liftgateoperation to reverse the operation.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures or under low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan still be operated manually.

If the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power function isin progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.If the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park) and the vehicle acceleratesbefore the power liftgate latchesclosed, the liftgate may reverse tothe open position. Cargo could fallout of the vehicle. The power liftgatemust be closed and latched beforedriving.

If the liftgate is power opened andthe support struts have lostpressure, the lights will flash and achime will sound. The liftgate willstay open temporarily, then slowlyclose. See your dealer/retailer forservice before using the liftgate ifthis occurs.


Obstacle Detection Features

A warning chime will sound and theliftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed or openposition if the liftgate encounters anobstacle during a power open orclose cycle. After removing theobstruction, the power liftgateoperation can be used again.

If the liftgate comes across moreobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function deactivates, andyou must manually open or closethe liftgate. A message displays,LIFTGATE OPEN, to indicate thatthe liftgate is open. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) (With DICButtons) on page 5‑22 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) (WithoutDIC Buttons) on page 5‑28 for

more information. After removingthe obstructions, manually open theliftgate to the full open position orclose the liftgate to the fully closedand latched position. The liftgateresumes normal power operation.

Pinch sensors are located on theside edges of the liftgate. If anobject is caught between the liftgateand the vehicle and presses againstthis sensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and open fully. The liftgatewill remain open until it is activatedagain or closed manually. Do notforce the liftgate open or closedduring a power cycle.

Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, press the switch on thecenter console to OFF.

With the power liftgate disabledand all of the doors unlocked, theliftgate can be manually openedand closed.


To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the handle on theoutside of the liftgate and lift thegate open. To close the liftgate, usethe pull cup to lower the liftgate andclose. The liftgate latch will powerclose. Always close the liftgatebefore driving.

If the RKE button or the power closebutton on the liftgate is pressedwhile power operation is disabled,the lights will flash three times, butthe liftgate will not move.

It is not recommended that youdrive with the liftgate open.However, if you must drive with theliftgate open, the liftgate should beset to manual operation by pressingthe OFF switch on the centerconsole.

Vehicle SecurityVehicle theft is big business,especially in some cities. Thisvehicle has theft-deterrent features,however, they do not make itimpossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemOn vehicles with an anti-theft alarmsystem, to activate the system:

. Press Q on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or thepower door lock switch whenany door is open.

The security light flashes.

When the door is closed, thesecurity light stops flashing andstays on solid for approximately30 seconds. The content theftdeterrent alarm is not armeduntil the security light goes off.

If the delayed locking feature isactive, the alarm is not activateduntil all doors are closed and thesecurity light goes off.

. Press Q when the driver door isclosed. The security light comeson solid for approximately30 seconds and then goes off.The content theft deterrent alarmis not armed until the securitylight goes off.

The theft-deterrent system will notactivate if the doors are locked withthe vehicle's key or the manualdoor lock.

If a locked door is openedwithout using the RKE transmitter,a ten second pre-alarm occurs.The horn chirps and the lights flash.


If the key is not placed in theignition and turned to START or thedoor is not unlocked by pressing Qduring the ten second pre-alarm,the alarm goes off. The headlampsflash and the horn sounds for about30 seconds, then turns off to savethe battery power.

The vehicle can be started with thecorrect ignition key if the alarm hasbeen set off.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle with the door

key after the doors are closed.. Unlock the door with the RKE

transmitter. Unlocking a door anyother way sets off the alarm ifthe system has been armed.

Press K or place the key in theignition and turn it to START to turnoff the alarm.

Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lowerthe driver side window and openthe driver door.

2. Press Q .

3. Get out of the vehicle, close thedoor and wait for the securitylight to go out.

4. Then reach in through thewindow, unlock the door with themanual door lock and open thedoor. This should set off thealarm.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould, but the vehicle's headlampsflash, check to see if the hornworks. The horn fuse may be blown.To replace the fuse, see Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 10‑30.

If the alarm does not sound or thevehicle's headlamps do not flash,see your dealer/retailer for service.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industryand Science Canada.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turned toON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY orSTART from the LOCK/OFFposition.


You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light comes on if thereis a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key® III+ systemsenses an incorrect key, the vehicledoes not start. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start thevehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical keycodes.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light on the instrumentpanel comes on when trying to startthe vehicle, there may be a problemwith your theft-deterrent system.Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key and checkthe fuses. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑30 foradditional information. If the enginestill does not start with the otherkey, the vehicle needs service. If thevehicle does start, the first key maybe faulty. See your dealer/retailerwho can service the PASS-Key® III+to have a new key made. In anemergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑6.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedto the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all thecurrently programmed keys are lost

or do not operate, you must seeyour dealer/retailer or a locksmithwho can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmedto the system.

See your dealer/retailer or alocksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new keyblank that is cut exactly as theignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key hasa 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmedkey in the ignition and start theengine. If the engine does notstart, see your dealer/retailer forservice.

3. After the engine has started,turn the key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.


4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to the ON/RUNposition within five seconds ofthe original key being turned tothe LOCK/OFF position.

The security light turns off oncethe key has been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost ordamaged, see your dealer/retailer ora locksmith to have a newkey made.

The SERVICE THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM messagedisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) when there is aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Anti-Theft AlarmSystem Messages on page 5‑36for additional information.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.


Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on the driverdoor armrest.

To adjust each mirror:

1. Press (A) or (B) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad toadjust the mirror.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle and thearea behind it can be seen.

4. Press either (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.

Folding Mirrors

Manual

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.To fold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward,to return it to the original position.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑4 for moreinformation.

Blind Spot MirrorsThe blind spot mirror is a smallconvex mirror built into the upperand outer corner of both outsidemirrors. It can show objects thatmay be in the vehicle's blind zone.


Driving with the Blind SpotMirror

Actual Mirror View

1. When the approaching vehicle isa long distance away, the imagein the main mirror is small andnear the inboard edge of themirror.

2. As the vehicle gets closer, theimage in the main mirror getslarger and moves outboard.

3. As the vehicle enters the blindzone, the image transitions fromthe main mirror to the blind spotmirror.

4. When the vehicle is in the blindzone, the image only appears inthe blind spot mirror.

Using the Outside Mirror withthe Blind Spot Mirror

1. Set the main mirror so that theside of the vehicle can just beseen and the blind spot mirrorhas an unobstructed view.

2. When checking for traffic orbefore changing a lane, look atthe main driver/passenger sidemirror to observe traffic in theadjacent lane, behind yourvehicle. Check the blind spotmirror for a vehicle in the blindzone. Then, glance over yourshoulder to double checkbefore moving slowly into theadjacent lane.


Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle has the memorypackage, the outside mirrors have apark tilt feature. This feature tilts theoutside mirrors to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This allows the driverto view the curb for parallel parking.

The passenger and/or driver mirrorreturns to its original positionwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or the ignition is turnedoff or to OFF/LOCK.

This feature can be turned on or offthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑40 for more information.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust the inside rearview mirror tosee clearly behind your vehicle.Hold the mirror in the center tomove it up or down and side to side.Use the day/night adjustment tohelp prevent glare from theheadlamps behind you. Move thelever to the right for nighttime useand to the left for daytime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer/retailer for more informationabout OnStar and how to subscribeto it. See the OnStar® owner guidefor more information on the servicesOnStar provides.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.

Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight illuminates each time theignition is turned to start.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons for theOnStar® system. See your dealer/retailer for more information aboutOnStar® and how to subscribe to it.See the OnStar® owner guide formore information about the servicesOnStar® provides.


O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

The vehicle may also have a RearVision Camera (RVC). See RearVision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑34for more information.

If the vehicle has RVC, the Obutton for turning the dimmingfeature on or off will not beavailable.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

They could operate the powerwindows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move.The windows will function andthey could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavekeys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

Uplevel shown, base similar

The power window controls arelocated on each of the side doors.

The driver door also has switchesthat control the passenger andrear windows. The power windowswork with the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑16.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull up on the front edge ofthe switch to raise the window.

Express-Up/Express-DownWindows

A window with the express-up/downfeature allows it to be raised orlowered without holding the switch.Press or pull the window switch fullyand release it to activate theexpress feature. The express modecan be canceled by pressing orpulling the switch.


Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected,or replaced, windows with theexpress-up feature need to bereprogrammed for this feature towork. To program the window:

1. Close all doors with the ignitionin the ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN position, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑16.

2. Press and continue to hold thewindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull up and hold the windowswitch to close the window.Continue to hold it briefly afterthe window is fully closed.

4. Repeat for each window that hasthe express-up feature.

Anti-Pinch Feature

The anti-pinch feature is onwindows with the express-upfeature. If an object is in the way ofthe window as it is express-closing,or in certain weather conditions likesevere icing, the window will stopand open to a factory presetposition. The window functionsnormally once the obstruction isremoved.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The windowlockout switch is located with thepower window switches on thedriver door armrest. This featureprevents the rear windows frombeing operated, except from thedriver position. Press the switch toturn the lockout feature on or off.An indicator light will come on toshow the lockout feature is on.

Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount and slide it along therod from side-to-side to cover thedriver or passenger side of the frontwindow. Swing the sun visor to theside to cover the side window. It canbe moved along the rod fromside-to-side in this position also.

Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror

The vehicle has lighted visor vanitymirrors on both the driver andpassenger sun visors. Pull the sunvisor down and lift the mirror coverto turn the lamps on.


Roof

SunroofThe ignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY to operate thesunroof and power sunshade. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑16

The vehicle may have a sunroofover the front seats and a rearsunroof over the second row seats.The rear sunroof does not open.The switch to operate the frontsunroof is on the headliner abovethe rearview mirror.

Vent: From the closed position,press and hold the front of theswitch to vent the sunroof. Pressand hold the rear of the switch toclose the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close:From the closed position, press andrelease the rear of the switch toexpress-open the sunroof. Pressand release the front of the switch toexpress-close the sunroof.

The front sunshade must be openedand closed manually. Push up onthe sunshade handle to open thesunshade.

Manual Sunshades

On a vehicle with only manualsunshades, press the button on thesunshade handle to release it andguide it back. Pull the sunshadeforward until it latches to close it.


Rear Power Sunshade

On vehicles with a rear powersunshade, the switch is on theheadliner above the rearview mirror.

Notice: The rear sunshade couldbe damaged if you attempt toopen or close it manually. Do notmanually open or close the rearsunshade.

To open the rear sunshade, locatedover the second row seats, pressand release the rear of the switch.Press and release the front of theswitch to close the sunshade.

Do not keep the sunroof open forlong periods of time while thevehicle is not in use. Debris cancollect in the tracks, damage thesunroof operation and plug thewater draining system.

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Heated and VentilatedFront Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-30Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-30Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-34When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-45

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-46Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-52Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-54Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-61

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

Securing Child Restraints(Right FrontPassenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

1. Pull the head restraint up toraise it. To lower the headrestraint, press the releasebutton, located on the headrestraint post on the top of theseatback, while you push thehead restraint down.

2. Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released tomake sure that it is locked inplace.


Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver's seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver's seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

A. Manual Seat Adjustment Handle

B. Driver Seat Height Adjuster.

C. See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑7 .

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the handle (A) under the seatto unlock it.

2. Slide the seat and release thehandle.

Try to move the seat to be sure it islocked in place.

To manually raise or lower the seat,move the lever (B) repeatedlyupward or downward.


Power Seat Adjustment

Driver Seat with Power SeatControl, Power Recline,

and Power Lumbar shown

A. Power Seat Adjustment Control

B. Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑7 .

C. Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑6 .

On vehicles with power seats, thecontrols are located on the outboardside of the seats.

Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the power seatadjustment control (A) forward orrearward.

The vehicle may have additionalfeatures to adjust the power seat:. Raise or lower the entire seat

by moving the power seatadjustment control (A) upor down.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the rear part ofthe seat cushion by moving therear of the control up or down.

Memory Seat and Mirrors

On vehicles with the memorypackage, the controls for thisfeature are located on the driverdoor panel. The controls are used toprogram and recall memory settingsfor the driver seat and outsidemirrors.


To save positions in memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, includingthe seatback recliner and bothoutside mirrors to a comfortableposition.

See Power Mirrors onpage 2‑17 for more information.

Not all mirrors will have theability to save and recall themirror positions.

2. Press and hold button 1 untiltwo beeps let you know that theposition has been stored.

A second seating and mirrorposition can be programmed byrepeating the above steps andpressing button 2.

To recall the memory positions,the vehicle must be in P (Park).Press and release either button 1 orbutton 2 corresponding to thedesired driving position. The seatand outside mirrors will move to theposition previously stored. You willhear a single beep.

Using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter to enter thevehicle, with the remote recallmemory feature on, causesautomatic seat and mirroradjustment. There is no adjustmentwhen the position has not beenchanged by another seating positionor the easy exit feature. See“MEMORY SEAT RECALL” underVehicle Personalization (With DICButtons) on page 5‑40 for moreinformation.

To stop recall movement of thememory feature at any time, pressone of the power seat controls,memory buttons, or power mirrorbuttons.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the driver seat recall maystop working. If this happens, pressthe appropriate control for the areathat is not recalling for two seconds,after the obstruction is removed.Then try recalling the memoryposition again by pressing theappropriate memory button. If thememory position is still not beingrecalled, see your dealer/retailer forservice.


Easy Exit Seat

The control for this feature islocated on the driver door panelbetween buttons 1 and 2.

With the vehicle in P (Park), the exitposition can be recalled by pressingthe exit button. You will hear asingle beep. The driver seat willmove back.

If the easy exit seat feature is on inthe Driver Information Center (DIC),automatic seat movement will occurwhen the key is removed from theignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT”under Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5‑40 formore information.

Further programming for thememory seat feature can be doneusing the DIC. You can select orcancel the following:. The automatic easy exit seat

feature.. The remote memory seat recall

feature.

For programming information, seeVehicle Personalization (With DICButtons) on page 5‑40.

Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

On vehicles with this feature, thehandle is located on the inboardside of the seatback.

Move the handle forward orrearward to increase or decreaselumbar support.


Power Lumbar

On vehicles with power lumbar, thecontrol is located on the outboardside of the seat. See “PowerLumbar” under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4 for moreinformation.

To increase or decrease lumbarsupport, press and hold the front orrear of the control (C).

Release the control when theseatback reaches the desired levelof lumbar support.

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver's seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver's seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

In vehicles with seats that havemanual reclining seatbacks, thelever used to operate them islocated on the outboard side of theseat. See Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3 .

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the recline lever (C).

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to an uprightposition, do the following:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.



Power Reclining Seatbacks

In vehicles with seats that havepower reclining seatbacks, thecontrol used to recline them islocated on the outboard side of theseat. See Power Seat Adjustmenton page 3‑4 for more information.

To recline the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control (B)

rearward.. To bring the seatback forward,

tilt the top of the control forward.

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifyour vehicle is moving.


Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

On vehicles with heated front seats,the controls are located on thecenter console. To operate theheated seats the engine must berunning.

I (Heated Seatback): Press toturn on the heated seatback.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to turn on or off the heatedseat and seatback.

The light on the button will come onto indicate that the feature is on.Each time the button is pressed, thetemperature settings change fromhigh, to medium, to low, to off.Indicator lights above the button willshow the level of heat selected:three for high, two for medium, andone for low.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

If the vehicle has remote vehiclestart and is started using the RKEtransmitter, the front heated seatswill be turned on to the high settingif it is cold outside. See “RemoteVehicle Start” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 . When theignition is turned on, the heated seatfeature will turn off. To turn theheated seat feature back on, pressthe desired button.


Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

On vehicles with the heated andventilated seat feature, the controlsare located on the front doors nearthe door handle.

H (Ventilated Seat): Press toventilate the entire seat.

This symbol appears on the climatecontrol display to indicate that thefeature is on.

z (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to heat the entire seat.

This symbol appears on the climatecontrol display to indicate that thefeature is on.

For either feature press the buttononce for the highest setting. Witheach press of the switch, the seatchanges to the next lower setting,and then the off setting. The lightsindicate three for the highest settingand one for the lowest.

The heated and ventilated seats arecanceled after the ignition is turnedoff. To use the heated and ventilatedseat feature after the vehicle isstarted, you will need to press theappropriate seat button again.

Rear Seats

A. Seat Adjustment Handle

B. Reclining Seatback Strap

C. Sliding Seat Lever


Entering and Exiting theThird Row

{ WARNING

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To access the third row:

1. Remove objects on the floor infront of or on the second rowseat, or in the seat tracks on thefloor.

2. Move the front center consolearmrest completely forward.See Center Console Storageon page 4‑1 .

3. Place folding armrests in theupright position.

4. Ensure that the safety belt isunfastened and in the stowedposition.

5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C)forward and move the seatbackforward. The seat cushion willfold, and the entire seat will slideforward.

Returning the Seat to theSeating Position

To return the second row seat to itsnormal seating position:

1. Remove objects on the floorbehind the second row seat or inthe seat tracks on the floor.

2. Pull the seatback rearward untilit is locked in place.

3. Slide the seat rearward bypushing on the seatback until itis locked into place.

4. Push down on the rear of theseat cushion until it is locked inplace.

5. Push and pull on the seatbackand seat cushion to make surethey are locked in place.

6. Check that the safety belt is notunder the seat cushion.


Reclining the Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Leaning forward in the seat, pullthe reclining seatback strap (B).

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe strap to lock the seatback inplace.


Folding the Rear Seat

To fold the second row seats:

1. Remove anything on or underthe seat.

2. Place the armrest in the uprightposition, and unfasten thesafety belt.

3. Pull forward on the recliningseatback strap (B) and pushdown on the seatback.

If the headrest touches the frontseat, slide the second row seatrearward.

To return the seatback to theseating position, lift the upper cornerof the seatback and push itrearward until it locks into place.Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

Adjusting the Seats

To adjust the second row seats, pulloutward on the seat adjustmenthandle (A). Slide the seat forward orrearward to the desired position.Release the handle and push andpull on the seat to make sure it islocked.

Third Row Seats

{ WARNING

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or pushed forward in theentry position, could causeinjury in a sudden stop or crash.Be sure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sureit is locked into place.

The third row seats can be foldedforward or removed.



To fold the seatback:


2. Disconnect the rear safety beltmini-latch, using a key in the sloton the mini-buckle, let the beltretract into the headliner. Stowthe mini-latch in the holderlocated in the headliner.

3. Pull up on the release leverlocated on the back of the seat.The headrest moves forwardautomatically.

4. Push the seatback forward tolay flat.

To return the seatback to theseating position:

1. Raise the seatback into place byusing the pullstrap from the rearof the vehicle, or by pushing itinto place from inside thevehicle.

2. The headrest must be lockedinto place before sitting inthe seat.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.


{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

4. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle.Do not let it twist.

5. Pull on the safety belt to be surethe mini-latch is secure.

Removing the Third Row Seats

1. Remove the cargo managementsystem, if it is in the vehicle. SeeCargo Management System onpage 4‑3 .



3. Fold the seatback down. See“Folding the Seatback” earlier inthis section.

4. Remove the rear bolts locatedon the floor on each side ofthe seat.

5. Remove the seat by tilting itslightly upward, and then pullingit out of the rear of the vehicle inone motion.

6. Replace the bolts in the floorholes for storage.

Installing the Third Row Seats

1. Before installing the seat theseatback must be foldedforward. See “Folding theSeatback” earlier in this section.

The seats must be placed in theproper locations to attachcorrectly. The wider seat mustbe installed on the driver sideand the narrower seat on thepassenger side. Remove thebolts from the holes in the floorbefore installing the seats.

2. Place the seat on the vehiclefloor so that the front seat hooksare on the vehicle bars.


3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to55Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on theseat to make sure it is locked inplace.

4. Raise the seatback to its uprightposition. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked into place.

5. Push the headrest up intoposition. Push and pull on theheadrest to make sure it islocked into place.

6. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle.Do not let it twist.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be,if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, and checkthat your passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑13 for additionalinformation.


In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in acrash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it.


Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...


or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get more timeto stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is true notonly in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25miles) of home.And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deathsoccur at speeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.


How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding in thevehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑47 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑49. Followthose rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehiclein a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front of you.The lap part of the belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, just

touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply forceon your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.


Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.


{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lap beltand apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.The lap belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.


A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.



A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.


{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.


A: The belt is behind the body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could movetoo far forward increasing thechance of head and neck injury.You might also slide under thelap belt. The belt force would thenbe applied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seatingposition with a detachable safetybelt and the safety belt is notattached, see Third Row Seats onpage 3‑12 for instruction onreconnecting the safety belt to themini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.


2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

4. Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑30.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Shoulder Belt HeightAdjustment” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.


6. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pull thestitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so that theshoulder portion of the belt iscentered on the shoulder. The beltshould be away from the face andneck, but not falling off of theshoulder. Improper shoulder beltheight adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in acrash.


To move it down, push down on thebutton (A) and move the heightadjuster to the desired position.You can move the height adjusterup by pushing up on the shoulderbelt guide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the button to makesure it has locked into position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, for vehicleswith side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten thesafety belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System PartsAfter a Crash on page 3‑31.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer/retailer. The guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for olderchildren who have outgrown boosterseats and for some adults. Wheninstalled and properly adjusted, thecomfort guide positions the shoulderbelt away from the neck and head.


Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

Outboard Positions

1. For the outboard positions,remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior body.

For the third row center position,locate the comfort guide which islocated in a storage pocket, atthe top of the seat, under theheadrest on the driver's side ofthe vehicle. To access thecomfort guide, you will first needto move the headrest forward bypulling on the handle behind theseatback. The comfort guide willnow be accessible.

Third Row Center Position

Pull the comfort guide out of itsstorage location and then returnthe headrest to its uprightposition.

2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.


3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section.Make sure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide into its storage location oron its storage clip.


Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer/retailer willorder you an extender. When yougo in to order it, take the heaviestcoat you will wear, so the extenderwill be long enough for you. To helpavoid personal injury, do not letsomeone else use it, and use itonly for the seat it is made to fit.

The extender has been designed foradults. Never use it for securingchild seats. To wear it, attach it tothe regular safety belt. For moreinformation, see the instructionsheet that comes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors andanchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn orfrayed safety belts may not protectyou in a crash. They can rip apartunder impact forces. If a belt is tornor frayed, get a new one right away.


Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑13 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care onpage 3‑31.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer/retailer to have thesafety belt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14.


Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driver,passenger seated directlybehind the driver, and the thirdrow outboard passengerposition.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger, passengerseated directly behind the rightfront passenger, and the thirdrow outboard passengerposition.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑36.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.


{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑47 orInfants and Young Children onpage 3‑49.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14 formore information.


Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.


Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, passengersbehind the driver and right frontpassenger, and the third rowoutboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.


When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System on page 3‑32.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags will


inflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflate inrear impacts. A seat-mounted sideimpact airbag is intended to deployon the side of the vehicle that isstruck. Both roof-rail airbags willdeploy when either side of thevehicle is struck, or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over, or in a severefrontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest to thedoor. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modules in

the ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stopping theoccupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.


Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑36 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑37.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.


You can lock the doors, turn off theinterior lamps and hazard warningflashers by using the controls forthose features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑15 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑16.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer/retailerfor service.


Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the instrument panel when thevehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. If you are

using remote start, if equipped, tostart the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑15.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag,seat-mounted side impact airbagsand the roof-rail airbags are notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.


{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑15.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.


For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may notturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson’s seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehiclewho has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat ) on page 3‑62 orSecuring Child Restraints (RightFront Passenger Seat) onpage 3‑64.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatbackand adjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2 .

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.


If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,

use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑45 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.


A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will enable(turn on) the passenger airbagwhile a child restraint or childoccupant is on the seat. If thepassenger airbag is turned on,the on indicator will be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14 forimportant safety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle.

Your dealer/retailer and the servicemanual have information aboutservicing the vehicle and the airbagsystem. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 13‑13.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.


Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,rollover sensor module, or airbagwiring can affect the operation ofthe airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing systemfor the right front passenger

position, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or with GMcovers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑40.

If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are in

Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10‑51 for additionalimportant information.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual.

In addition, your dealer/retailer andthe service manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.


Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑14 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑37. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in your vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly and maynot protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure your airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑14 for more information.


Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt until thechild passes the below fit test:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑24 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.


Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑24.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.


Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is also

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

better to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.


Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle'sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight and

height limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.


Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.


Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle's safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑55 formore information. Children can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.


Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great, if the airbagdeploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑40 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.


Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructions

that came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be attached using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).


Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built intothe vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

If the child restraint does not have atop tether, one can be obtained, inkit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second Row— Bucket

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.


Second Row— 60/40 Bench


j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

Third Row


To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each second row anchorposition has a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the cover ornear the anchor.


Second Row — Bucket Shown,Bench Similar

The top tether anchors are locatedat the bottom rear of the seatbackfor each seating position in thesecond row. Open the cover toaccess the anchors. Be sure to usean anchor located on the same sideof the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Third Row Seat

The third row has one top tetheranchor located at the bottom rear ofthe center seatback. This anchorshould be used for the centerseating position only. Never installtwo top tethers using the same toptether anchor.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

Accident statistics show thatchildren are safer if they arerestrained in the rear rather than thefront seat. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑54 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle'ssafety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.


{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraintso children cannot reach them.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock,if your vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desired

seating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Recline the seatback to thefull reclined position.

Make sure the second rowbench seatbacks arealigned at the same anglebefore placing the childrestraint on the seat. Makesure the third row benchseatbacks are both uprightbefore placing the childrestraint on the seat.


1.3. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.4. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if the vehicle has one.Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. If the anchor is covered, flipopen the cover to exposethe anchor.

2.3. Route, attach and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.


If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a dual tether, routethe tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sureit is secure.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer/retailer to havethe system inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.


Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat )When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑55 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑55 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑54.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.




4. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑55 for moreinformation.


To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.


Securing Child Restraints(Right FrontPassenger Seat)The vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑54.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑40 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑15 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑40 for additionalinformation.


If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑55 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑55 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑15.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.




5. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.


If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑40 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-1Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo ManagementSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel StorageThis vehicle has an instrumentpanel storage area located abovethe radio. To open the cover, pressthe button.

Glove BoxLift the glove box handle up to openit. Use the key to lock and unlockthe glove box.

CupholdersThere are two cupholders, withremovable liners, located in frontof the center console. There may becupholders located in the secondrow seat armrest. To access, pullthe armrest down. There areadditional cupholders located oneach side of the third row seatand in each door. There may be

cupholders located at the rear of thecenter console. To access, pull thehandle down.

Armrest StorageVehicles with a rear seat armrest,have two cupholders. Pull thearmrest down from the rearseatback to access the cupholders.

Center Console Storage

Pull up on the lever, located on thefront of the center console armrest,to slide it forward and backward.

4-2 Storage

To open the armrest storage area,press the button located on the frontof the armrest. There is additionalstorage under the armrest. Movethe armrest all the way to the rearposition, slide the cover back andremove the tray.

Floor Console Storage

For vehicles with a second rowcenter console, open each area toaccess the storage compartmentinside.

To access the upper storage area,press the upper button (B) and liftup. To access the lower storagearea, press the lower button (C) andlift up. The top of the console canbe folded forward for increasedstorage area. Lift up on handle onthe rear of the console (A) and pullforward.

{ WARNING

Never open more than one of thethree latches at a time to helpavoid personal injury and damageto the console.

Notice: Slide the front consoleas far forward as it will go beforefolding the second row consoleforward to help prevent damageto the consoles.

Storage 4-3

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with a cargo cover, itcan be used to cover items in therear of the vehicle. To install thecover, place the loops on eachcorner of the cover on the fourhooks in the rear of the vehicle.The cover should be storedsecurely when not in use.

Cargo Tie DownsFour cargo tie-downs are located inthe rear compartment of the vehicle.The tie-downs can be used tosecure small loads.

Cargo ManagementSystemThis vehicle has a cargomanagement system locatedin the rear of the vehicle.

To remove the cargo managementcover:

1. Open the cover. It remains openwhen lifted.

2. Pull the cover up making sure tounhook the hinges at the rear ofthe cover.

{ WARNING

An improperly latched and closedcargo cover, or cargo cover leftin the open position, could bethrown about the vehicle during acollision or sudden maneuver.Someone could be injured.Be sure to return the cover tothe closed position and latchbefore driving. If the cover isremoved, always store it outsideof the vehicle. When it isreplaced, always be sure thatit is securely reattached.

3. Remove the cover from thevehicle and store outside of thevehicle.

Convenience NetFor vehicles with a convenience netin the rear, use it to store smallloads as far forward as possible.The net should not be used to storeheavy loads.

4-4 Storage

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— the windcan catch it while the vehicle isbeing driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collision,and damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMCertified accessory carrier.

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items.For roof racks that do not havecrossrails included, GM Certifiedcrossrails can be purchased as anaccessory. See your dealer/retailerfor additional information.

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace. Do not exceed the maximumvehicle capacity when loading thevehicle.

For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gages, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Fuel Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Engine CoolantTemperature Gage . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Voltmeter Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-13Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-14Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-16MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-20StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-20Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-21Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Information DisplaysDriver Information Center(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 5-22

Driver Information Center(DIC) (Without DICButtons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-32Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-32Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-32Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-34Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-34Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-34Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-35Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-36Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-37Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-38Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-39Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-39

5-2 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization(With DIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . 5-40

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-47Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustmentThe steering wheel can be adjusted.

The adjustment lever is on theoutboard side of the steeringcolumn.

Pull the lever down to move thesteering wheel up or down and in orout. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Power Tilt Wheel

For vehicles with the power tilt andtelescope wheel, the control is onthe outboard side of the steeringcolumn.

Push the control up or down to tiltthe steering wheel up or down.


Push the control forward orrearward to move the steering wheeltoward the front or rear of thevehicle. To set the memory position,see Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5‑40.

Steering Wheel Controls

Vehicles with audio steering wheelcontrols could differ depending onthe vehicle's options. Some audiocontrols can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

w /x (Next / Previous): Press toselect preset or favorite radiostations, select tracks on a CD/DVD, or to select tracks andnavigate folders on an iPod® orUSB device.

To select preset or favorite radiostations:

. Press and releasew orx to goto the next or previous radiostation stored as a preset orfavorite.

To select tracks on a CD/DVD:

Press and releasew orx to go tothe next or previous track.

To select tracks on an iPod or USBdevice for vehicles without anavigation system:

1. Press and holdw orx whilelistening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and releasew orx toscroll up or down the list, thenpress and holdw , or press¨to play the highlighted track.

To select tracks on an iPod or USBdevice for vehicles with a navigationsystem:

1. Press and holdw orx whilelistening to a song listed in themain audio page, to quicklymove forward or in reversethrough the tracks. See theseparate Navigation Systemmanual for more information.

Track information is displayed onthe screen. Releasew orxwhen the desired track isreached.

2. Press and releasex to beginplaying the track shown in thedisplay.


To navigate folders on an iPod orUSB device for vehicles without anavigation system:

1. Press and holdw orx whilelistening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and holdx to go back tothe previous folder list.

3. Press and releasew orx toscroll up or down the list.. To select a folder, press

and holdw , or press¨when the folder ishighlighted.

. To go back further in thefolder list, press andholdx .

To navigate folders on an iPod orUSB device for vehicles with anavigation system:

1. Go to the Music Navigator byfirst touching the center touchscreen folder button in the mainaudio page.

2. While in Music Navigator, selectthe folder/artist/genre/category,etc. using the touch screen.

3. Press and releasex to scrollthrough the selected music list.Touch the track label on thetouch screen to highlight andbegin playing the track fromthat list.

4. Press and holdx to quicklyscroll through the selectedmusic list

bg (Mute/Push to Talk): Pressto silence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar® systems, press and holdfor longer than two seconds to

interact with those systems. SeeBluetooth on page 7‑48 and theOnStar Owner's Guide for moreinformation.

c (End): Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

SRCE (Source/VoiceRecognition): Press to switchbetween the radio, CD, and forvehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary,and rear auxiliary.

For vehicles with the navigationsystem, press and hold this buttonfor longer than one second toinitiate voice recognition. See “VoiceRecognition” in the NavigationSystem manual for moreinformation.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to the nextradio station while in AM,FM, or XM™.

For vehicles with or without anavigation system:

Press¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD orDVD slot.


Press¨ to select a track or afolder when navigating folders on aniPod or USB device.

For vehicles with a navigationsystem:

1. Press and hold¨ until a beepis heard, to place the radio intoSCAN mode, a station will playfor five seconds before movingto the next station.

2. To stop the SCAN function,press¨ again.

3. In CD/DVD, iPod, or AUX USB,press and hold to quickly moveforward through the tracks.Release to stop on the desiredtrack.

+ e − e (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the volume.

HornPress near or on the horn symbolson the steering wheel pad to soundthe horn.

Windshield Wiper/WasherThe windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the left side of thesteering column.

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn theband to8 and then release.

Several wipes, hold the band on8longer.

9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

1 : Slow wipes.

2 : Fast wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10‑26.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. A circuit breaker stops themuntil the motor cools.


Windshield Washer

J (Washer Fluid): Press thebutton at the end of the turn signal/lane change lever, to spray washerfluid on the windshield. The wipersclear the windshield and either stopor return to the preset speed. Theignition key must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN for this towork. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑21 Windshield WasherFluid .

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDis displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) when thewasher fluid is low. See WasherFluid Messages on page 5‑39.

Rear Window Wiper/WasherThe rear wiper and rear wash buttonis located on the instrument panelbelow the climate control system.

Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn therear wiper on and off. The wiperspeed cannot be changed.

Y (Wash): Press to spray washerfluid on the rear window. Thewindow wiper will also come on.Release the button when enoughfluid has been sprayed on thewindow. The rear wiper will run afew more cycles after it is released.If the rear wiper function wasalready on, prior to pressing thewash button, it stays on until thewiper button is pressed again.

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid that is in the windshieldwasher reservoir. See Washer Fluidon page 10‑21.

CompassYour vehicle may have a compassin the Driver Information Center(DIC). See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) onpage 5‑22 or Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)on page 5‑28 for more informationabout the DIC.

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eight uponleaving the factory. Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone foryour location.

Under certain circumstances, suchas during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zone isnot set correctly.


Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving. Onlyset it when the vehicle is inP (Park).

Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press the set/reset button toscroll through and select theappropriate variance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel button untilthe vehicle heading, forexample, N for North, isdisplayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.


If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be astrong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CB orcell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zone isset to the variance zone in whichthe vehicle is located. See“Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof,climate controls, seats, etc.during the calibration procedure.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press the set/reset button tostart the compass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehicle intight circles at less than 5 mph(8 km/h) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETE for afew seconds when thecalibration is complete. The DICdisplay will then return to theprevious menu.


ClockTo adjust the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, thenpressO , to turn the radio on.

2. Press G to display HR, MIN,MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,month, day, and year).

3. Press the pushbutton locatedunder any one of the labels to bechanged.

4. To increase the time or date, doone of the following:. Press the pushbutton below

the selected label.

. Press¨ SEEK.

. Press\ FWD.

. Turn f clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date, doone of the following:

. Press© SEEK.

. Presss REV.

. Turn f counter-clockwise.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press G and then thepushbutton located under theforward arrow that displays onthe radio screen until the time12H (hour) and 24H (hour), andthe date MM/DD (month andday) and DD/MM (day andmonth) displays.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedunder the desired option.

3. Press G again to apply theselected default, or let thescreen time out.

Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cellular phone.

The vehicle may have fouraccessory power outlets. They arelocated on the instrument panelbelow the climate controls, underthe front center console cupholders,at the rear of the center console,and in the rear cargo area.


To use the outlets, remove thecover. When not in use, alwayscover the outlet with theprotective cap.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment on for extendedperiods will drain the battery.Always turn off electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum amperagerating of 20 amperes.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlets and couldresult in blown vehicle or adapterfuses. If you experience a problem,see your dealer/retailer foradditional information on theaccessory power outlet.

Notice: Adding any electricalequipment to the vehicle candamage it or keep othercomponents from working asthey should. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperagerating of 20 amperes. Check withyour dealer/retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damagenot covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not hang any type ofaccessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because the poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only.

Warning Lights,Gages, and IndicatorsWarning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gages can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gages and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.


Instrument Cluster

United States Uplevel version shown, Canada similar


SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in both kilometersper hour (km/h) and miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs anew odometer installed, the newone is set to the mileage of the oldodometer. If this is not possible, it isset at zero and a label is put on thedriver's door to show the oldmileage reading.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gage

United States Canada

When the ignition is on, the fuelgage indicates about how much fuelthe vehicle has left in the fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gage indicatesthe side of the vehicle the fuel dooris on.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gage:. At the gas station, the gas pump

shuts off before the gagereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gage indicated.For example, the gage mighthave indicated the tank was half

full, but it actually took a littlemore or less than half the tank'scapacity to fill the tank.

. The gage moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gage does not go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gage


This gage shows the engine coolanttemperature. If the gage pointermoves into the red area, it meansthat the engine coolant hasoverheated. If the vehicle has beenoperated under normal driving


conditions, pull off the road, stop thevehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑18 for more information.

Voltmeter Gage

When the engine is not running, butthe ignition is on, this gage displaysthe battery voltage in DC volts.

When the engine is running, thegage shows the condition of thecharging system. The gage cantransition from a higher to lower or alower to higher reading. This isnormal. Readings between the lowand high warning zones indicate thenormal operating range. The

voltmeter gage can also read lowerwhen in fuel economy mode. This isnormal.

Readings in the low warning zonecan occur when a large number ofelectrical accessories are operatingin the vehicle and the engine is leftidling for an extended period. Thiscondition is normal since thecharging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can only be driven for ashort time with the reading in eitherwarning zone. If the vehicle must bedriven, turn off all unnecessaryaccessories.

Readings in either warning zoneindicate a possible problem in theelectrical system. Have the vehicleserviced as soon as possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

The driver safety belt reminder lighton the instrument panel cluster.

When the engine is started this lightand the chime come on and stay onfor several seconds to remind thedriver to fasten the safety belt. Thelight also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the driver safety belt is alreadybuckled, neither the light nor chimecomes on.


Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the engine is started this lightand the chime come on and stay onfor several seconds to remind thepassenger to fasten their safety belt.The light also begins to flash.

This only occurs if the passengerairbag is enabled. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑40 formore information.

This cycle repeats if the passengerremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat such

as a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crashsensing and diagnostic module. Formore information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 3‑32.

This light will come on and stay onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. Then the lightshould go out.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle has been started orcomes on when while driving, theairbag system may not workproperly. Have the vehicle servicedright away.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.


Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑40 forimportant safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several seconds

as a system check. If you are usingremote start to start the vehicle froma distance, if equipped, you may notsee the system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passengerfrontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.


Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer/retailer. Driving while thislight is on could drain the battery.

When this light comes on, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) alsodisplays the SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM message.

See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑31 for more information.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light comes on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

If the check engine light comes onand stays on, while the engine isrunning, this indicates that there isan OBD II problem and service isrequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle's fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.


Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the key off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer/retailer for service assoon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected.. Make sure the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑41. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle's electrical systemmight be wet. The condition isusually corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A fewdriving trips should turn thelight off.


. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off.

See Gasoline Specifications onpage 9‑39.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer/retailer cancheck the vehicle. The dealer/retailer has the proper testequipment and diagnostic tools tofix any mechanical or electricalproblems that might havedeveloped.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and localgovernments have or might beginprograms to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on the vehicle.Failure to pass this inspection couldprevent getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things to know tohelp the vehicle pass an inspection:. The vehicle will not pass this

inspection if the check enginelight is on with the enginerunning, or if the key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.

. The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the OBD II(on-board diagnostic) systemdetermines that critical emissioncontrol systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has run

down. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the vehiclefor inspection.

Brake System WarningLightThis vehicle's hydraulic brakesystem is divided into two parts.If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop thevehicle. For good braking both partsneed to be working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.



This light should come on brieflywhen the ignition key is turned toON/RUN. If it does not come onthen, have it fixed so it will be readyto warn if there is a problem.

This light may also come on due tolow brake fluid. See Brakes onpage 10‑22 for more information.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will also comeon when the parking brake is set.The light will stay on if the parkingbrake does not release fully. If itstays on after the parking brake isfully released, it means there is abrake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased. The pedal may be harderto push or, the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑82.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light


The ABS warning light comes onbriefly when the ignition key isturned to ON/RUN. This is normal.If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready towarn you if there is a problem.

If the light stays on, turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.


Then start the engine again to resetthe system. If the light still stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is noton, there are still brakes, but noantilock brakes. If the regular brakesystem warning light is also on,there are no antilock brakes andthere is a problem with the regularbrakes. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑18.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light comes on when the Tow/Haul mode has been activated.

For more information, see Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑24.

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer. If the system isworking normally the indicator lightgoes off.

If it stays on, or comes on whiledriving, there could be a problemwith the StabiliTrak system and thevehicle might need service. Whenthis warning light is on, the systemis off and will not limit wheel spin.

This light flashes when theStabiliTrak system is active.

See StabiliTrak System onpage 9‑27 for more information.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on briefly whenthe engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer.If the system is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the light comes on and stays onwhile driving, the vehicle may havea problem with the cooling system.Stop the vehicle and turn off theengine to avoid damage to theengine. A warning chime soundswhen this light is on.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑18 for more information.


Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with a tire pressuremonitoring system, this light comeson briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TirePressure Monitoring System.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message in theDriver Information Center (DIC), canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑37 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the tire

loading information label. See TirePressure on page 10‑42 for moreinformation.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may be aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and stays onsteady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑44 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem.


Security Light

This light flashes when the securitysystem is activated.

For more information, see Anti-TheftAlarm System on page 2‑13.

High-Beam on Light

The high-beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on whenever thecruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑30 for moreinformation.

Information Displays

Driver Information Center(DIC) (With DIC Buttons)If your vehicle has DIC buttons, theinformation below explains theoperation of this system.

The DIC displays information aboutyour vehicle. It also displayswarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay located at the top of theinstrument panel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC also displays a shift leverposition indicator on the bottom lineof the display. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑22 formore information.


The outside air temperature andcompass, if equipped, also displayon the DIC when viewing the tripand fuel information. The outside airtemperature automatically appearsin the top right corner of the DICdisplay. If there is a problem withthe system that controls thetemperature display, the numberswill be replaced with dashes. If thisoccurs, have the vehicle serviced.The compass will be shown in thebottom right corner of the DICdisplay. See Compass onpage 5‑6 for more information.

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located on theinstrument panel.

The DIC also allows some featuresto be customized. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑40 for more information.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, youcan also use the trip odometer resetstem to view the odometer and tripodometers.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the set/reset,customization, vehicle information,and trip/fuel buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in thefollowing pages.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.

U (Customization): Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on your vehicle. SeeVehicle Personalization (With DICButtons) on page 5‑40 for moreinformation.

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life,park assist on vehicles with thisfeature, units, tire pressure readingson vehicles with this feature,Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter programming, andcompass calibration and zonesetting on vehicles with this feature.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto display the odometer, tripodometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, timer, fuel used, andaverage speed.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

OIL LIFE

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays. This display shows anestimate of the oil's remaining usefullife. If you see 99%OIL LIFEREMAINING on the display, that


means 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life systemwill alert you to change the oil on aschedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑34. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10‑8. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE display yourself after each oilchange. It will not reset itself. Also,be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.

To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

PARK ASSIST

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,press the vehicle information buttonuntil PARK ASSIST displays. Thisdisplay allows the system to beturned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset button toselect between ON or OFF. If youchoose ON, the system will beturned on. If you choose OFF, thesystem will be turned off. The URPAsystem automatically turns back onafter each vehicle start. When theURPA system is turned off and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park), theDIC will display the PARK ASSISTOFF message as a reminder thatthe system has been turned off. SeeObject Detection System Messageson page 5‑35 and UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑32 formore information.

UNITS

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select betweenEnglish or Metric units ofmeasurement. Once in this display,press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRICunits. All of the vehicle informationwill then be displayed in the unit ofmeasurement selected.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).Press the vehicle information buttonuntil the DIC displays FRONTTIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicleinformation button again until theDIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.


If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising youadd air to a specific tire will appearin the display. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑42 and Tire Messages onpage 5‑37 for more information.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer/retailer for service.

RELEARN REMOTE KEY

This display allows you to matchRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters to your vehicle. Thisprocedure will erase all previouslylearned transmitters. Therefore, theymust be relearned as additionaltransmitters.

To match an RKE transmitter to yourvehicle:

1. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TORELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button untilREMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE is displayed.

3. Press and hold the lock andunlock buttons on the firsttransmitter at the same time forabout 15 seconds.

On vehicles with memory recallseats, the first transmitterlearned will match driver 1 andthe second will match driver 2.

A chime will sound indicatingthat the transmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmittersat this time, repeat Step 3.

Each vehicle can have amaximum of eight transmittersmatched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode,you must cycle the key toLOCK/OFF.

COMPASS ZONE SETTING

This display will be available if thevehicle has a compass. SeeCompass on page 5‑6 for moreinformation.

COMPASS RECALIBRATION

This display will be available if thevehicle has a compass. SeeCompass on page 5‑6 for moreinformation.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the following menuitems:

ODOMETER

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km). Pressing the tripodometer reset stem will alsodisplay the odometer.


To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “UNITS”earlier in this section.

TRIPA and TRIP B

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRIPA or TRIP B displays. Thisdisplay shows the current distancetraveled in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km) since the last resetfor each trip odometer. Both tripodometers can be used at the sametime. Pressing the trip odometerreset stem will also display the tripodometers.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing the set/reset button or the trip odometerreset stem while the desired tripodometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled retroactive reset. This can beused to set the trip odometer to thenumber of miles (kilometers) drivensince the ignition was last turned on.This can be used if the tripodometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retroactive reset feature,press and hold the set/reset buttonfor at least four seconds. The tripodometer will display the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) drivensince the ignition was last turned onand the vehicle was moving. Oncethe vehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 5 miles (8 km) before it isstarted again, and then theretroactive reset feature is activated,the display will show 5miles (8 km).As the vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles(8.4 km), etc.

If the retroactive reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) thatwere driven during the last ignitioncycle.

RANGE

Press the trip/fuel button untilRANGE displays. This displayshows the approximate number ofremaining miles (mi) orkilometers (km) the vehicle can bedriven without refueling. The displaywill show LOW if the fuel levelis low.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving. Fuelrange cannot be reset.


AVG (Average) ECONOMY

Press the trip/fuel button until AVGECONOMY displays. This displayshows the approximate averagemiles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of mpg (L/100 km) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. To reset AVGECONOMY, press and hold the set/reset button.

Fuel Economy

Press the trip/fuel button until FUELECONOMY displays. The FUELECONOMY display shows anestimate of the vehicle fueleconomy under a given drivingcondition at a specific moment. Forexample, if the vehicle isaccelerating and achieving low fuelefficiency this display will showfewer bars, but if the vehicle iscruising on a flat freeway andgetting high fuel efficiency, thedisplay will show more bars. Fueleconomy cannot be reset.

TIMER

Press the trip/fuel button untilTIMER displays. This display can beused as a timer.

To start the timer, press the set/reset button while TIMER isdisplayed. The display will show theamount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset, notincluding time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be counted aslong as the ignition is on, even ifanother display is being shown onthe DIC. The timer will record up to99 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/resetbutton briefly while TIMER isdisplayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press andhold the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed.

FUEL USED

Press the trip/fuel button until FUELUSED displays. This display showsthe number of gallons (gal) orliters (L) of fuel used since the lastreset of this menu item. To reset thefuel used information, press andhold the set/reset button while FUELUSED is displayed.

AVG (Average) SPEED

Press the trip/fuel button until AVGSPEED displays. This displayshows the average speed of thevehicle in miles per hour (mph) orkilometers per hour (km/h). Thisaverage is calculated based on thevarious vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value. Toreset the value to zero, press andhold the set/reset button.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.


Driver Information Center(DIC) (Without DICButtons)If your vehicle does not have DICbuttons, the information belowexplains the operation of thissystem.

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe trip odometer reset stem locatedon the instrument panel cluster.Pressing the trip odometer resetstem will also turn off,or acknowledge, DIC messages.

The DIC displays trip and vehiclesystem information, and warningmessages if a system problem isdetected.

If your vehicle does not have DICbuttons, you can use the tripodometer reset stem to view thefollowing displays: odometer, tripodometers, oil life, park assist menufor vehicles with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system,

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter programming, units, anddisplay language.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, youcan use the trip odometer resetstem to view the following displays:odometer and trip odometers.

Trip Odometer Reset StemMenu Items

ODOMETER

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil ODOMETER displays. Thisdisplay shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in eithermiles (mi) or kilometers (km).

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “UNITS”later in this section.

TRIPA or TRIP B

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil TRIPA or TRIP B displays. Thisdisplay shows the current distancetraveled in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km) since the last reset

for each trip odometer. Both tripodometers can be used at thesame time.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing andholding the trip odometer reset stemwhile the desired trip odometer isdisplayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. Thiscan be used to set the trip odometerto the number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the trip odometerreset stem for at least four seconds.The trip odometer will display thenumber of miles (mi) orkilometers (km) driven since theignition was last turned on and thevehicle was moving. Once thevehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle was


driven 5 miles (8 km) before it isstarted again, and then theretro-active reset feature isactivated, the display will show5miles (8 km). As the vehicle beginsmoving, the display will thenincrease to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) thatwere driven during the last ignitioncycle.

OIL LIFE

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). Press the tripodometer reset stem until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil'sremaining useful life. If you see99%OIL LIFE REMAINING on thedisplay, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. The engineoil life system will alert you to

change the oil on a scheduleconsistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑34. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10‑8. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE display yourself after each oilchange. It will not reset itself. Also,be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

PARK ASSIST

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). If your vehiclehas the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, press the tripodometer reset stem until PARKASSIST displays. This displayallows the system to be turned on oroff. Once in this display, press andhold the trip odometer reset stem toselect between ON or OFF. If youchoose ON, the system will beturned on. If you choose OFF, thesystem will be turned off. The URPAsystem automatically turns back onafter each vehicle start. When theURPA system is turned off and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park), theDIC will display the PARK ASSISTOFF message as a reminder thatthe system has been turned off. SeeObject Detection System Messageson page 5‑35 and UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑32 formore information.


RELEARN REMOTE KEY

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). This displayallows you to match RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitters toyour vehicle. This procedure willerase all previously learnedtransmitters. Therefore, they mustbe relearned as additionaltransmitters.

To match an RKE transmitter to yourvehicle:

1. Press the trip odometer resetstem until RELEARN REMOTEKEY displays.

2. Press and hold the trip odometerreset stem until REMOTE KEYLEARNING ACTIVE isdisplayed.

3. Press and hold the lock andunlock buttons on the firsttransmitter at the same time forabout 15 seconds.

On vehicles with memory recallseats, the first transmitterlearned will match driver 1 andthe second will match driver 2.

A chime will sound indicatingthat the transmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmittersat this time, repeat Step 3.

Each vehicle can have amaximum of eight transmittersmatched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode,you must cycle the key toLOCK/OFF.

UNITS

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). Press the tripodometer reset stem until UNITSdisplays. This display allows you toselect between English or Metricunits of measurement. Once in thisdisplay, press and hold the tripodometer reset stem to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC

units. All of the vehicle informationwill then be displayed in the unit ofmeasurement selected.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). This displayallows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages willappear. To select a language:

1. Press the trip odometer resetstem until DISPLAY LANGUAGEdisplays.

2. Continue to press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem to scrollthrough all of the availablelanguages.

The available languages areENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS(French), ESPANOL (Spanish),and NO CHANGE.

3. Once the desired language isdisplayed, release the tripodometer reset stem to set yourchoice.


Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed by thedriver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appear oneafter another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you can pressany of the DIC buttons on theinstrument panel or the tripodometer reset stem on theinstrument panel cluster toacknowledge that you received themessages and to clear them fromthe display.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. You should take anymessages that appear on thedisplay seriously and remember thatclearing the messages will onlymake the messages disappear, notcorrect the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayedand some information about them.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem detects that the batteryvoltage is dropping below expectedlevels. The battery saver systemstarts reducing certain features ofthe vehicle that you may be able tonotice. At the point that the featuresare disabled, this message isdisplayed. It means that the vehicleis trying to save the charge in thebattery.

Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system. Undercertain conditions, the chargingsystem light may also turn on in theinstrument panel cluster. SeeCharging System Light onpage 5‑16. Driving with thisproblem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Have the electricalsystem checked as soon aspossible. See your dealer/retailer.


Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑18. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service as soon aspossible. See your dealer/retailer.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE SET TOXXX

This message displays wheneverthe cruise control is set. See CruiseControl on page 9‑30 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver door is not fullyclosed and the vehicle is shifted outof P (Park). Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

HOOD OPEN

On some models, this messagedisplays and a chime sounds if thehood is not fully closed. Stop andturn off the vehicle, check the hoodfor obstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver side rear door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for

obstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LIFTGATE OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the liftgate is open whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn offthe vehicle and check the liftgate.Restart the vehicle and check forthe message on the DIC display.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger door is notfully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.


RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger side reardoor is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C (AirConditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 5‑12. To avoidadded strain on a hot engine, the airconditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When thecoolant temperature returns tonormal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possibleto avoid damage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible. Donot increase the engine speedabove normal idling speed. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑18for more information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage onpage 5‑12.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 10‑20 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible. Donot increase the engine speedabove normal idling speed. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑18for more information.

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.


Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See EngineOil Life System on page 10‑10 forinformation on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑8 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 formore information.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine oil pressure islow, severe engine damage mayoccur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on theinstrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicleuntil the cause of the low oil

pressure is corrected. See EngineOil on page 10‑8 for moreinformation.

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑8.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and a chimesounds when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑18for further information.

This message also displays whenthe vehicle's engine power isreduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle's ability toaccelerate. If this message is on,but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance maybe reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be drivenat a reduced speed while thismessage is on, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer/retailer for service as soon aspossible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and a chimesounds if the fuel level is low. Refuelas soon as possible. See Fuel Gageon page 5‑12 and Fuel onpage 9‑38 for more information.


TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument panel cluster if thevehicle's fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑16. Reinstall thefuel cap fully. See Filling the Tankon page 9‑41. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.

Key and Lock Messages

REMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE

This message displays while youare matching a Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter to yourvehicle. See “MatchingTransmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3

and Driver Information Center (DIC)(With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑22 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Without DIC Buttons) onpage 5‑28 for more information.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned off.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned on.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turnsignal/multifunction lever to the offposition.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASSIST OFF

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,after the vehicle has been startedand shifted out of P (Park), thismessage displays to remind thedriver that the URPA system hasbeen turned off or to notify the driverthat the system has turned itself off.


Press the set/reset button orthe trip odometer reset stem toacknowledge this message andclear it from the DIC display. Formore information see UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑32.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,this message displays if there is aproblem with the URPA system. Donot use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑32 for more information.See your dealer/retailer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak®

system. If this message appears, tryto reset the system. Stop; turn offthe engine for at least 15 seconds;then start the engine again. If thismessage still comes on, it means

there is a problem. See your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle issafe to drive, however, you do nothave the benefit of StabiliTrak, soreduce your speed and driveaccordingly.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealer/retailer for service. See StabiliTrakSystem on page 9‑27 for moreinformation.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See StabiliTrak Systemon page 9‑27 for more information.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Have your dealer/retailer inspect thesystem for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14 andAirbag System on page 3‑32 formore information.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer/retailer beforeturning off the engine. SeeImmobilizer Operation onpage 2‑14 for more information.


THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the contenttheft-deterrent system has detecteda break-in attempt while you wereaway from your vehicle. SeeAnti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑13 for more information.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE A/C (AirConditioning) SYSTEM

This message displays when theelectronic sensors that control theair conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working.Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer/retailer ifyou notice a drop in heating and airconditioning efficiency.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays when aproblem is detected with the powersteering system. When thismessage is displayed, you maynotice that the effort required tosteer the vehicle increases or feelsheavier, but you will still be able tosteer the vehicle. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailerimmediately.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays when anon-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer as soon aspossible.

STARTING DISABLEDSERVICE THROTTLE

This message displays when yourvehicle's throttle system is notfunctioning properly. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

Tire Messages

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

This message also displays LEFTFRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (rightfront), LEFT RR (left rear),or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicatethe location of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑21.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire LoadingInformation label. See Tires onpage 10‑36, Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑42.


You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the same time,press the set/reset button or the tripodometer reset stem. The DIC alsoshows the tire pressure values. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)(With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑22 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Without DIC Buttons) onpage 5‑28.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on theTPMS is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5‑21. Severalconditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑44 formore information. If the warning

comes on and stays on, there maybe a problem with the TPMS. Seeyour dealer/retailer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when theTire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) is re-learning the tirepositions on your vehicle. The tirepositions must be re-learned afterrotating the tires or after replacing atire or sensor. See Tire Rotation onpage 10‑48, Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑43, and TirePressure on page 10‑42 for moreinformation.

Transmission Messages

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays when there is a compactspare tire on the vehicle, when theAntilock Brake System (ABS)warning light comes on, or when the

rear differential fluid is overheating.This message turns off when thedifferential fluid cools.

The AWD system is disabled untilthe compact spare tire is replacedby a full-size tire. If the warningmessage is still on after putting onthe full-size tire, you need to resetthe warning message. To reset thewarning message, turn the ignitionoff and then back on again after30 seconds. If the message stayson, see your dealer/retailer rightaway. See All-Wheel Drive onpage 9‑25 for more information.

SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthis system. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle after 30 seconds and checkfor the message on the DIC display.If the message is still displayed or


appears again when you begindriving, the AWD system needsservice. See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer/retailer for service.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, you can damage thetransmission. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by your warranty. Donot drive your vehicle withoverheated transmission fluidor while the transmissiontemperature warning is displayed.

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TOXXX MPH (KM/H)

This message displays when yourvehicle speed is limited to 80 mph(128 km/h) because the vehicledetects a problem in the speedvariable assist steering system.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low. Fillthe windshield washer fluid reservoiras soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Washer Fluid onpage 10‑21 for more information.


VehiclePersonalization

Vehicle Personalization(With DIC Buttons)Your vehicle may havecustomization capabilities that allowyou to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changed fromtheir default state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customization buttonto enter the featuresettings menu.

If the menu is not available,FEATURE SETTINGSAVAILABLE IN PARK willdisplay. Before entering themenu, make sure the vehicle isin P (Park).

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear.


Press the customization button untilthe DISPLAY LANGUAGE screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

You can also change the languageby pressing the trip odometer resetstem. See “Language” under DriverInformation Center (Without DICButtons) earlier in this section formore information.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the vehicle's doors willautomatically lock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑8 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR LOCK appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 8 mph(13 km/h) for three seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑8 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only thedriver's door will unlock when thekey is taken out of the ignition.


DRIVER IN PARK: Only thedriver's door will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park) .

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the RKEtransmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressedagain within five seconds of theprevious command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.


LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thevehicle's doors and liftgate will bedelayed. When locking the doorsand liftgate with the power door lockswitch and a door or the liftgate isopen, this feature will delay lockingthe doors and liftgate untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice or the

lock button on the RKE transmittertwice. See Delayed Locking onpage 2‑7 for more information.

Press the customization button untilDELAY DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor or the liftgate is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when it

is dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button untilEXIT LIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

30 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for30 seconds.

1MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for two minutes.




APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlights turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off. See

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 formore information.

NO CHANGE : No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.


CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization button untilCHIME VOLUME appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


PARK TILT MIRRORS

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select whetheror not the outside mirror(s) willautomatically tilt down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑19for more information.


Press the customization button untilPARK TILT MIRRORS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outsidemirror will be tilted down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver'soutside mirror will be tilted downwhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

PASSENGER MIRROR: Thepassenger's outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's andpassenger's outside mirrors will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).



EASY EXIT SEAT

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the automatic easy exit seatfeature. See Delayed Locking onpage 2‑7 for more information.

Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT SEAT appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No automatic seatexit recall will occur.

ON: The driver's seat will moveback when the key is removed fromthe ignition.

The automatic easy exit seatmovement will only occur one timeafter the key is removed from theignition. If the automatic movementhas already occurred, and you putthe key back in the ignition andremove it again, the seat andsteering column will stay in theoriginal exit position, unless amemory recall took place prior toremoving the key again.



MEMORY SEAT RECALL

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the remote memory seat recallfeature. See Delayed Locking onpage 2‑7 for more information.


Press the customization button untilMEMORY SEAT RECALL appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memoryseat recall will occur.

ON: The driver's seat and outsidemirrors will automatically move tothe stored driving position when theunlock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed. See “Relearn Remote Key”under Driver Information Center(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) onpage 5‑22 or Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)on page 5‑28 for more informationon matching transmitters to driver IDnumbers.



REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to turn the remote startoff or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑5 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE START appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.



FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the customization button untilFACTORY SETTINGS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.



EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press the customization button untilFEATURE SETTINGS PRESS VTO EXIT appears in the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toexit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again willreturn you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is shifted out of

P (Park).. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.. The trip/fuel or vehicle

information DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40 second time period haselapsed with no selection made.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for information regardingPart 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industryand Science Canada.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.


Do not use the Universal HomeRemote with any garage dooropener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Home Remote. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist you withprogramming the Universal HomeRemote.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future Universal HomeRemote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale ofthe vehicle, the programmedUniversal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for securitypurposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in thissection.

When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-head orgate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate that is beingprogrammed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in yourhand-held transmitter for quickerand more accurate transmission ofthe radio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalHome Remote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-800-355-3515 or goto www.homelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, pressand hold down the two outsidebuttons at the same time,releasing only when theUniversal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds. This step willerase the factory settings or allpreviously programmed buttons.

Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and donot repeat this step to programthe remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons.


2. Hold the end of your hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm(1 to 3 inches) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicator lightin view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of your garagedoor opener receiver (motorhead unit).

3. At the same time, press andhold both the Universal HomeRemote button to be used tocontrol the garage door and thehand-held transmitter button. Donot release the Universal HomeRemote button or the hand-heldtransmitter button until Step 4has been completed.

Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 3 with theprocedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.

4. The indicator light on theUniversal Home Remote willflash slowly at first and thenrapidly after Universal HomeRemote successfully receivesthe frequency signal from thehand-held transmitter. Releaseboth buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trainedUniversal Home Remote buttonand observe the indicator light.. If the indicator light stays

on continuously, theprogramming is completeand the garage door shouldmove when the UniversalHome Remote button ispressed and released.There is no need tocontinue programmingSteps 6 through 8.

. If the Universal HomeRemote indicator lightblinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns

to a constant light, continuewith the programmingSteps 6 through 8.

It may be helpful to haveanother person assist withthe remaining steps.

6. After Steps 1 through 5 havebeen completed, locate insidethe garage the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit). Locate the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name andcolor of the button may vary bymanufacturer.


7. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button. Afteryou press this button, you willhave 30 seconds to completeStep 8.

8. Immediately return to thevehicle. Firmly press and holdthe Universal Home Remotebutton, selected in Step 3 tocontrol the garage door, fortwo seconds, and then releaseit. If the garage door does notmove, press and hold the samebutton a second time fortwo seconds, and then releaseit. Again, if the door does notmove, press and hold the samebutton a third time fortwo seconds, and then release.

The Universal Home Remoteshould now activate thegarage door.

To program the remaining twoUniversal Home Remote buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem.” Do not repeat Step 1, asthis will erase all previousprogramming from the UniversalHome Remote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming

If you have questions or need helpprogramming the Universal HomeRemote System, call1-800-355-3515 or go towww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be longenough for Universal Home Remoteto pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming a gateoperator or garage door opener byusing the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures,regardless of where you live,replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with thefollowing:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonwhile you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-heldtransmitter button until thefrequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by theUniversal Home Remote. TheUniversal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” to complete the trainingprocedure.


Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using Universal Remote

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator lightwill come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteButtons

All programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Remote device:

1. Press and hold down the twooutside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote Button

To reprogram any of the threeUniversal Remote buttons, repeatthe programming instructions earlierin this section, beginning withStep 2.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices on page 13‑3.


2 NOTES

Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-6Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

6-2 Lighting

The exterior lamps control has fourpositions:

9 (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control offor on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

; (Parking Lamps): Turns theparking lamps on together with thefollowing:. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turns theheadlamps on together with thefollowing lamps listed below.A warning chime sounds if thedriver's door is opened when theignition switch is off and theheadlamps are on.. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/lanechange lever away from you to turnthe high beams on.

Pull the lever towards you to returnto low beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal to thevehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

If the headlamps are off or in thelow-beam position, pull the turnsignal lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high-beams.

Release the lever to turn thehigh-beam headlamps off.

Lighting 6-3

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)/AutomaticHeadlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is in the ON/RUN

position.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, the regularheadlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,and other lamps will not be on.The instrument panel and clusterwill also not be lit.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings.The other lamps that come on withthe headlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will go off and theDRL will come on.

Do not cover the light sensor on topof the instrument panel because itworks with the DRL.

Delayed HeadlampsDelayed headlamps provide aperiod of exterior lighting as youleave the area around the vehicle.This feature is activated when theheadlamps are on due to theautomatic headlamps controlfeature, and when the ignition isturned off. The headlamps remainon until the exterior lamps control ismoved to the parking lamps positionor until the pre-selected delayedheadlamp lighting period has ended.

If the ignition is turned off with theexterior lamp control in the parkinglamps or headlamps position, thedelayed headlamps cycle will notoccur.

To disable the delayed headlampsfeature or change the time of delay,see Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5‑40.

Hazard Warning Flashers| Hazard Warning Flasher:Press this button located on theinstrument panel below the audiosystem, to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.This warns others that you arehaving trouble. Press again to turnthe flashers off.

The turn signals do not work whilethe hazard warning flashers are on.

6-4 Lighting

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmight be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑30.

Turn Signal On Chime

If either one of the turn signals areleft on and the vehicle has beendriven more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km),a chime will sound.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlD (Instrument PanelBrightness): The knob with thissymbol on it is next to the exteriorlamps control to the left of thesteering wheel. Push the knob inall the way until it extends out andthen turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe lights. Push the knob back inwhen finished.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps automaticallycome on when a door is opened.The lamps can also be turned onmanually by fully turning theinstrument panel brightness controlclockwise.

Lighting 6-5

The reading lamps, located on theheadliner above the rearview mirror,can be turned on or off independentof the automatic courtesy lamps,when the doors are closed.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps are located in theoverhead console and above therear seat passengers.

The dome lamps automaticallycome on when a door is opened,unless the dome lamp overridebutton is pressed in.

The lamps can also be turned onand off by turning the instrumentpanel brightness control clockwiseto the farthest position.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button isnext to the exterior lamps control.

E (Dome Lamp Override): Pressthe button in and the dome lampsremain off when a door is opened.Press the button again to return it tothe extended position so that thedome lamps come on when a dooris opened.

Reading LampsPress the button near each lamp toturn them on or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingFor vehicles with courtesy lamps,they come on and stay on for a settime whenever the unlock symbol ispressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, if thevehicle has one.

If a door is opened, the lamps stayon while it is open and then turn offautomatically about 20 secondsafter the door is closed. If the unlocksymbol is pressed and no door isopened, the lamps turn off afterabout 20 seconds.

Entry lighting includes a featurecalled theater dimming. With theaterdimming, the lamps do not turn offat the end of the delay time.Instead, they slowly dim and thengo out. The delay time is canceled ifthe ignition key is turned to ON/RUNor the power door lock switch ispressed. The lamps will dimright away.

6-6 Lighting

When the ignition is on, illuminatedentry is inactive, which means thecourtesy lamps will not come onunless a door is opened.

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting illuminatesthe interior for a period of time afterall the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayedentry lighting to work. Immediatelyafter all the doors have been closed,the delayed entry lighting featurecontinues to work until one of thefollowing occurs:. The ignition is in ON/RUN.. The doors are locked.. An illumination period of about

25 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination period adoor is opened, the timedillumination period is canceled andthe interior lamps remain on.

Delayed Exit LightingDelayed exit lighting illuminates theinterior for a period of time after thekey is removed from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayedexit lighting to work. When the keyis removed, interior illuminationactivates and remains on until oneof the following occurs:. The ignition is in ON/RUN.. The power door locks are

activated.. An illumination period of

20 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination period adoor is opened, the timedillumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain onbecause a door is open.

Parade DimmingThis feature automatically prohibitsthe dimming of the instrument paneldisplays in daylight while theheadlamps are on so that thedisplays are still able to be seen.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gage or a voltagedisplay on the Driver Information

Lighting 6-7

Center (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.

It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays,it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) onpage 5‑22 or Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)on page 5‑28.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature helps prevent thebattery from being drained, if theinterior courtesy lamps, reading/maplamps, visor vanity lamps or trunklamp are accidentally left on. If anyof these lamps are left on, theyautomatically turn off after10 minutes, if the ignition is off.The lamps will not come back onagain until one of the followingoccurs:. The ignition is turned on.. The exterior lamps control is

turned off, then on again.

The headlamps will timeout after10 minutes, if they are manuallyturned on while the ignition is onor off.

6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES

Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15MP3 (Radio with CD andRadio with CD/USB) . . . . . . . 7-23

MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) . . . 7-29Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

IntroductionRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the roadfor extended periods could causea crash resulting in injury ordeath to you or others. Do notgive extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls ofthe audio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and presetradio stations.

7-2 Infotainment System

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑16 for moreinformation.

Navigation/Radio System

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the separate NavigationSystem manual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

Operation

Radio with CD, Radio with CD/USB similar


Radio with CD, DVD, and USB

The vehicle may have one of theseradios as its audio system.

Radios with CD, DVD, and USB

Radios with CD, DVD, and USBhave a Bose® Surround SoundSystem. Some of its features areexplained later in this sectionunder, “Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)”.

If the vehicle has a Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system, it hasa CD, DVD, and USB radio. SeeRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑37 for moreinformation on the vehicle's RSEsystem.

The DVD player is the top slot onthe radio faceplate. The playeris capable of reading the DTSprogrammed DVD Audio or DVDVideo media. DTS and DTS DigitalSurround are registered trademarksof Digital Theater Systems, Inc..

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories.


Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

For vehicles with a RearEntertainment System (RSE), pressand hold for more than two secondsto turn off the entire radio and RSEsystem and to start the parentalcontrol feature. Parental controlprevents the rear seat occupantfrom operating the Rear Seat Audio(RSA) system or remote control.

A lock symbol displays next to theclock display while the parentalcontrol feature is being used.The feature remains on until O ispressed and held for more thantwo seconds, or the driver turns theignition off and exits the vehicle.

4 (Information): Press to switchthe display between the radiostation frequency and the time.When the ignition is in the OFFposition, press 4 to display the time.For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMAor RDS features, press 4 to displayadditional text information related tothe current FM-RDS or XM station;or CD, MP3 or WMA song.If information is available during XM,CD, MP3 or WMA playback, thesong title information displays onthe top line of the display and artistinformation displays on the bottomline. When information is notavailable, “NO INFO” is displayed.

Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service,CD, MP3, and WMA features): Ifadditional information is availablefor the current song being played,Auto Text will automatically page/scroll the information everyfive seconds above the FAVpresets on the radio display.

To activate Auto Text:

1. Press MENU to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the softkey under AUTOTXT tab on the radio display.

3. Press the softkey under the ONtab on the radio display.

If 4 is pressed and the song titleor artist information is longer thanwhat can be displayed, the extrainformation will page everyfive seconds when Auto Textis activated.


Speed Compensated Volume(SCV): The Speed CompensatedVolume (SCV) feature automaticallyadjusts the radio volume tocompensate for road and wind noiseas the vehicle speeds up or slowsdown, so that the volume level isconsistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume.

2. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM (automaticvolume) tab on the radio display.

4. Press the softkey under theSpeed Compensated Volumesetting (OFF, Low, Med, or High)to select the level of radiovolume compensation. Pressthe softkey located below theBACK tab on the MENU SETUPdisplay or let the display time outafter approximately 10 seconds.Each higher setting allowsfor more radio volumecompensation at fastervehicle speeds.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press f until the tone controltabs display.

2. Continue pressing f to highlightthe tab, or press the softkeyunder the tab.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following until thelevels are obtained.

. Turn f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

. Press\ FWD,

ors REV.

If a station's frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the softkey under the BASS,MID, or TREB tab for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds andthe level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press f for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds.


EQ (Equalization): Press tochoose bass and treble equalizationsettings designed for different typesof music. The choices are pop, rock,country, talk, jazz, and classical.Selecting MANUAL or changingbass or treble, returns the EQ to themanual bass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audiosystem, the EQ settings are eitherMANUAL or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade):To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press f until the speaker controltabs display.

2. Continue pressing f to highlightthe tab, or press the softkeyunder the tab.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following until thelevels are obtained.

. Turn f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

. Press\ FWD,

ors REV.

To quickly adjust balance or fadeto the middle position, press thesoftkey under the BAL or FADE tabfor more than two seconds. A beepsounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press f for more than two secondsuntil a beep sounds.

Radios with CD and DVD fadedifferently depending on the DVDMedia type:. With DVD-A 5.1 Surround

media, the left front and rightfront speakers fade rearward,leaving the center front speakersunaffected until the lastfade step, then all frontspeakers mute.

. With DVD-V 5.1 Surroundmedia, surround sound ismaintained until Step 4 of theFade control is reached whilefading rearward. At that point theaudio system output changes toStereo to prevent the loss ofCenter channel output when thefull rearward fade position isreached.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.


Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibratedfor the vehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, itmeans that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Locked: This message displayswhen the THEFTLOCK® systemhas locked up the radio. Take thevehicle to your dealer/retailer forservice.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer/retailer.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The Radio Data System (RDS)feature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies uponreceiving specific information fromthese stations and only works whenthe information is available. Whilethe radio is tuned to an FM-RDSstation, the station name or callletters display. In rare cases, a radiostation could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radiofeatures to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM. The selectiondisplays.

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

© SEEK¨ : Press to go to theprevious or to the next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and hold© or¨ until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press either arrow again tostop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scansstations with a strong signal thatare in the selected band.


Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites whilethe vehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheelcontrols. See Steering WheelControls on page 5‑3.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Pressto go through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press FAV to display the page tostore the station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.When that softkey is pressedand released, the station thatwas set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.

To setup the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original mainradio screen showing the radiostation frequency tabs andto begin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen amount of numberedpages.

Satellite Radio

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio servicethat is based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radiohas a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. For more information,contact XM at www.xmradio.comor call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.and www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.


Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM. The selectiondisplays.

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

© SEEK¨ : Press to go to theprevious or to the next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and hold© or¨ until a beep sounds.The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press either arrowagain to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scansstations with a strong signal thatare in the selected band.

Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button isused to find XM™ stations when theradio is in the XM mode. To find XMchannels within a desired category:

1. Press BAND until the XMfrequency displays.

2. Press CAT to display thecategory tabs.

3. Continue pressing CAT until thedesired category name displays.. Radios with CD and DVD

can also navigate thecategory list by pressings REV or\ FWD.

4. Press either of the two buttonsbelow the desired category tabto immediately tune to the firstXM station associated with thatcategory.

5. To go to the next or previousXM station within the selectedcategory, do one of thefollowing:

. Turn f .

. Press the buttons below theright or left arrows on thedisplay.

. Press either SEEK arrow.

6. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV buttonor BAND button to display thefavorites again.

Undesired XM categories can beremoved through the setup menu.To remove an undesired category,perform the following:


2. Press the softkey below theXM CAT tab.

3. Turn f to display the category tobe removed.


4. Press the softkey under theRemove tab until the categoryname along with the wordRemoved displays.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.

Removed categories can berestored by pressing the softkeyunder the Add tab when a removedcategory is displayed or by pressingthe softkey under the RestoreAll tab.

Categories cannot be removed oradded while the vehicle is movingfaster than 8 km/h (5 mph).

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites whilethe vehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheelcontrols. See Steering WheelControls on page 5‑3.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Pressto go through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press FAV to display the page tostore the station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.When that softkey is pressedand released, the station thatwas set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.

To setup the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original mainradio screen showing the radiostation frequency tabs andto begin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen amount of numberedpages.


XM™ Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels,or any others, can be blocked ata customer's request, by calling1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM™ signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth : This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another stationfor that preset button.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiverin the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after havingthe vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer/retailer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate theservice.


Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Check XM Receivr: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception fromcoast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference can cause an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.


Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is locatedon the roof of the vehicle. This typeof antenna is used with the AM/FMradio, as well as OnStar® and theXM™ Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, if the vehicle has thesefeatures. Keep this antenna clearof snow and ice build up for clearradio reception. If the vehicle hasa sunroof, the performance of theradio system may be affected if thesunroof is open. Loading items ontothe roof of the vehicle can interferewith the performance of the radiosystem and, if the vehicle has thisfeature, OnStar®. Make sure themulti-band antenna is notobstructed.

Audio Players

CD Player

Playing a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.

Z EJECT : Press and releaseto eject the disc that is currentlyplaying. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The disc can be removed.If the disc is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the discautomatically pulls back intothe player.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

© SEEK¨ : Press© to go tothe start of the current track, if morethan ten seconds on the CD haveplayed. Press¨ to go to the nexttrack.

If either arrow is held, or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track. Sound will be heardat a reduced volume. Release toresume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound will beheard at a reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.


RDM (Random): CD tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order with the randomsetting. To use random, press thesoftkey under the RDM label untilRandom Current Disc displays.Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the radio for futurelistening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toselect between CD, or Auxiliary.. When a CD is in the player

the CD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber displays.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD, itcould get caught in the CD player.If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners forCDs is not advised.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.


Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW Disc

The radio has the capability ofplaying an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW disc. For more informationon how to play an MP3/WMA CD-Ror CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radiowith CD and Radio with CD/USB)on page 7‑23 or MP3 (Radio withCD/DVD) on page 7‑29.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: Radios with aSingle CD player display CHECKDISC and/or ejects the CD if anerror occurs.

Optical Error: The disc wasinserted upside down.

Disk Read Error: A disc wasinserted with an invalid or unknownformat.

Player Error: There are disc LOADor disc EJECT problems.. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There could have been aproblem while burning the CD.

. The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the CD is not playing correctlyfor any other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message,write it down and provide it to yourdealer/retailer when reporting theproblem.

CD/DVD Player

Playing a CD (In Either theDVD or CD Slot)

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing(loading a disc into the system,depending on media type andformat ranges from 5 to 20 secondsfor a CD, and up to 30 seconds fora DVD to begin playing).

If the ignition or radio is turned off,while a CD is in the player, it staysin the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.The CD is controlled by the buttonson the radio faceplate or by the RSAunit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System on page 7‑46 for moreinformation. The DVD/CD decks,(upper slot is the DVD deck and thelower slot is the CD deck) of theradio are compatible with mostaudio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, andMP3/WMAs.


When a CD is inserted, the textlabel DVD or CD symbol displayson the left side of the radio display.As each new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

Z CD (Eject): Press and releaseto eject the disc that is currentlyplaying. The disc ejects from thebottom slot. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The disc can be removed.If the disc is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the discautomatically pulls back intothe player.

Z DVD (Eject): Press andrelease to eject the disc that iscurrently playing in the top slot.A beep sounds and Ejecting Discdisplays.

If loading and reading of a disccannot be completed, and thedisc fails to eject, press and holdZ DVD for more than five secondsto force the disc to eject.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

© SEEK¨ : Press© to goto the start of the current track ifthe track has played more thanfive seconds. If the track has playedless than five seconds the previoustrack will play.

Press¨ to go to the next track.

If either arrow is held, or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track. Sound will be heardat a reduced volume. Release toresume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound willbe heard at a reduced volume.Release to resume playing thetrack. The elapsed time of thetrack displays.

RDM (Random): CD tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order with the randomsetting. To use random, press thesoftkey under the RDM tab untilRandom Current Disc displays.Press the softkey again to turn offrandom play.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD or DVD is playing.The CD or DVD remains insidethe radio for future listening orfor viewing entertainment.


DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Pressto select between DVD, CD,or Auxiliary.. If an auxiliary input device is

not connected, “No Aux InputDevice” displays.

. When a disc is in either slot, theDVD/CD text tab and a messageshowing the track or chapternumber displays.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, and a disc is in boththe DVD slot and the CD slot theDVD/CD AUX button only cyclesbetween the two sources anddoes not indicate “No Aux InputDevice”.

. If a front auxiliary input device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUXbutton cycles through allavailable options.

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to only navigate theCD tracks through the remotecontrol.

See “Using the Auxiliary InputJack(s)” later in this section,or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑37 for moreinformation.

Care of CDs and DVDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.

Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD or DVD playerscans the bottom surface of thedisc. If the surface of a CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not playproperly or not at all. Do not touchthe bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage thesurface. Pick up CDs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.


Care of the CD and DVD Player

Do not add any label to a CD, itcould get caught in the CD or DVDplayer. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a descriptionlabel is needed, try labeling thetop of the recorded CD with amarking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners forCDs is not advised.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Radios with CD and DVDAudio Output

Only one audio source can beheard through the speakers at onetime. An audio source is defined asDVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM,Front Auxiliary Jack, or RearAuxiliary Jack.

PressO to turn the radio on.The radio can be heard throughall of the vehicle speakers.

Front seat passengers can listento the radio (AM, FM, or XM) bypressing BAND or DVD/CD AUX toselect the CD slot, DVD slot, front orrear auxiliary input (if available).

If a playback device is plugged intothe radio’s front auxiliary input jackor the rear auxiliary jack, the frontseat passengers are able to listen toplayback from this source through

the vehicle speakers. See “Usingthe Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later inthis section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)Jacks” under, Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑37 for more information.

In some vehicles, depending onaudio options, the rear speakerscan be muted when the RSA poweris turned on. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑46 formore information.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW Disc

The radio has the capability ofplaying an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW disc. For more informationon how to play an MP3/WMA CD-Ror CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radiowith CD and Radio with CD/USB)on page 7‑23 or MP3 (Radio withCD/DVD) on page 7‑29.


CD Messages

Optical Error: The disc wasinserted upside down.

Disk Read Error: A disc wasinserted with an invalid or unknownformat.

Player Error: There are disc LOADor disc EJECT problems.. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There could have been aproblem while burning the CD.

. The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the CD is not playing correctlyfor any other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message,write it down and provide it to yourdealer/retailer when reporting theproblem.

Using the DVD Player

The DVD player can be controlledby the buttons on the remotecontrol, the RSA system, or bythe buttons on the radio faceplate.See “Remote Control”, under RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) Systemon page 7‑37 and Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑46 formore information.

The DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate regioncode that is printed on the jacket ofmost DVDs.

The DVD slot of the radio iscompatible with most audio CDs,CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 andWMA formats.

If an error message displays on thevideo screen or the radio, see “DVDDisplay Error Messages” under,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑37 and “DVDRadio Error Messages” in thissection for more information.

Playing a DVD

f (Tune): Turn to change tracks ona CD or DVD, to manually tune aradio station, or to change clockor date settings, while in the clockor date setting mode. See theinformation given earlier in thissection specific to the radio, CD,and the DVD. Also, see “Settingthe Clock” in the index, for settingthe clock and date.


© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press to return tothe start of the current track orchapter. Press© again to goto the previous track or chapter.This button may not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

SEEK¨ (Next Track/Chapter):Press to go to the next track orchapter. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressto quickly reverse the DVD atfive times the normal speed. Theradio displays the elapsed timewhile in fast reverse. To stop fastreversing, press again. This buttonmay not work when the DVD isplaying the copyright informationor the previews.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press tofast forward the DVD. The radiodisplays the elapsed time and fastforwards five times the normalspeed. To stop fast forwarding,press again. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

Z (Eject): Press to eject a DVD.If the DVD is ejected, but notremoved, the player automaticallypulls it back in after 15 seconds.

If loading and reading of a DVDcannot be completed, because of anunknown format, etc., and the discfails to eject, press and hold formore than five seconds to force thedisc to eject.

DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons

Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several icons.Press the softkeys under any iconduring DVD playback. See the iconlist below for more information.

The rear seat passenger cannavigate the DVD-V menus andcontrols through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) Systemon page 7‑37 for more information.The Video Screen automaticallyturns on when the DVD-V isinserted into the DVD slot.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe play or pause icon displayed onthe radio system, to toggle betweenpausing or restarting playback ofa DVD.. If the forward arrow is showing

on display, the system is inpause mode.

. If the pause icon is showingon display, the system is inplayback mode.

. If the DVD screen is off, pressthe play button to turn thescreen on.


Some DVDs begin playing after thepreviews have finished, althoughthere could be a delay of up to30 seconds. If the DVD doesnot begin playing the movieautomatically, press the softkeyunder the play/pause icon displayedon the radio. If the DVD still doesnot play, refer to the on-screeninstructions, if available.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press to select thechoices that are highlighted inany menu.

y (Menu): Press to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thesoftkeys under the navigationarrows to navigate the cursorthrough the DVD menu. Aftermaking a selection press thisbutton. This button only operateswhen using a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when a DVD isplaying and a menu is active.

DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons

Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several icons.Press the softkeys under any iconduring DVD playback. See the iconlist below for more information.

The rear seat operator can navigatethe DVD-A menus and controlsthrough the remote control. See“Remote Control”, under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑37 for more information.The Video Screen does notautomatically power on when theDVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot.It must be manually turned on bythe rear seat occupant through theremote control power button.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe play or pause icon displayed onthe radio system, to toggle betweenpausing or restarting playback ofa DVD.. If the forward arrow is showing

on display, the system is inpause mode.

. If the pause icon is showingon display, the system is inplayback mode.

q Groupr : Press to cyclethrough musical groupings on theDVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

e (Audio Stream): Press to cyclethrough audio stream formatslocated on the DVD-A disc. Thevideo screen shows the audiostream changing.


Inserting a Disc

To play a disc, gently insert thedisc, with the label side up, into theloading slot. The DVD player mightnot accept some paper labeledmedia. The player starts loading thedisc into the system and shows“Loading Disc” on the radio display.At the same time, the radio displaysa softkey menu of option(s). Somediscs automatically play the moviewhile others default to the softkeymenu display, which requires thePlay, Enter, or Navigation softkeysto be pressed; either by the softkeyon the radio or by the rear seatpassenger using the remote control.

It may take up to 30 seconds for aDVD to begin playing.

Stopping and Resuming Playback

To stop playing a DVD withoutturning off the system, do oneof the following:

. Pressc on the remote control.

. Press the softkey under thestop or the play/pause iconsdisplayed on the radio.

. If the radio head is sourced tosomething other than DVD-V,press the DVD/CD AUX buttonto make DVD-V the activesource.

To resume DVD playback, do one ofthe following:

. Pressr / j on the remotecontrol.

. Press the softkey under the play/pause icon displayed on theradio.

The DVD should resume play fromwhere it last stopped if the dischas not been ejected and the stop

button has not been pressed twiceon the remote control. If the dischas been ejected or the stop buttonhas been pressed twice on theremote control, the disc resumesplaying at the beginning of the disc.

Ejecting a Disc

PressZ DVD on the radio to ejectthe disc. If a disc is ejected from theradio, but not removed, the radioreloads the disc after a short periodof time. The disc is stored in theradio. The radio does not resumeplay of the disc automatically. If themovie is reloaded and the RSAsystem is sourced to the DVD,the player begins to play again.If loading and reading a DVD orCD cannot be completed, and thedisc fails to eject, press and holdZ DVD for more than five secondsto force the disc to eject.


DVD Error Messages

Player Error: This messagedisplays when there are discload or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays, if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays, if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays, if no disc is present whenZ DVD or DVD/CD AUX ispressed on the radio.

MP3 (Radio with CD andRadio with CD/USB)

Format

Radios that have the capability ofplaying MP3s can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The filescan be recorded with the followingfixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps,192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and320 kbps or a variable bit rate.

Radios that have a USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files that arestored on a USB storage device aswell as AAC files that are stored onan iPod®.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio can play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3/WMA files. If bothformats are on the disc, the radioplays both file formats in the orderin which they were recorded tothe disc.

CD-R or CD-RW Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The radio supports:. Up to 50 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 15 playlists.. Up to 512 files and folders.. Playlists with an .m3u or

.wpl extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda

file extension.


USB Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 700 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes.. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file

extension.. AAC files stored on an iPod.. FAT16. FAT32

Root Directory

The root directory of the disc istreated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays on theradio as the CD label.

If a disc contains bothuncompressed CD audio and MP3/WMA files, a folder under the rootdirectory called CD accesses all ofthe CD audio tracks on the disc.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:. Playlists (Px).. Files stored in the root directory.. Files stored in folders in the root

directory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracksin each playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first trackin the first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen asthe default display. The new trackname displays.


File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treatedas special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or.pls file extension and are stored ona USB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMAfiles.

© SEEK: Press to go to thestart of the track, if more thanten seconds have played. Pressand hold or press multiple times tocontinue moving backward throughtracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press andhold to reverse playback quickly.Sound is heard at a reduced volumeand the elapsed time of the filedisplays. Releases REV toresume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thefile displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below Sc to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey belowc T to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

RDM (Random): Files on the disccan be listened to in random, ratherthan sequential order. To userandom, press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random Current Discdisplays to play songs in randomorder. Press the same softkey againto turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to play files inorder by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sortthe files by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing whileit is scanning in the background.


When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goesto the next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the artist displays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey located belowthe Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theback tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrowsand songs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod®

The USB Port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated in the center console.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the other

end to the USB port located in thecenter console. If the vehicle is onand the USB connection works,“OK to disconnect” and a GM logomay appear on the iPod and iPodappears on the radio's display. TheiPod music appears on the radio’sdisplay and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off and willnot charge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the AuxiliaryInput Jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” earlier for moreinformation.


Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs and displaysong information on the radio’sdisplay.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.



s REV (Reverse): Press andhold to reverse playback quickly.Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Releases REV toresume playing. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.

Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to use thatfunction.

j (Pause): Press the softkeybelow j to pause the track. The tabappears raised when pause is beingused. Press the softkey below jagain to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theback tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folder onthe USB drive. To browse andselect files:

1. Press the softkey belowc .

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the folder.If there is more than one folder,repeat Steps 1 and 2 until thefolder is reached.


4. Turn f to scroll through the filesin the selected folder.

5. Press f to select the file to beplayed.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

h (Music Navigator): Pressthe softkey belowh to view andselect a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres. Songs. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh .

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select the menu.

4. Turn f to scroll throughthe folders or files in theselected menu.







Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks. Thetab appears lowered when RepeatAll is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.


' (Repeat Track): Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.

Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below> ,2 ,< or= to selectbetween Shuffle Off, Shuffle AllSongs/Shuffle Songs, ShuffleAlbum, or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): This is thedefault mode when a USB storagedevice or iPod is first connected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs / ShuffleSongs): Shuffles all songs on theUSB storage device or iPod.

< (Shuffle Album): Shufflesall songs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.

MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD)

Format

The radio can play .mp3 or.wma files that were recordedonto a CD-R or CD-RW disc.

The USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files that arestored on a USB storage device aswell as AAC files that are stored onan iPod®.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio plays discs that containboth uncompressed CD audio andMP3/WMA files depending on whichslot the disc is loaded into.

The DVD Player only readsuncompressed audio and ignoresMP3/WMA files on a mixedmode disc.

The CD Player reads bothuncompressed audio and MP3/WMA files on a mixed mode disc.Uncompressd audio is played

before MP3/WMA files. Press theCAT (category) button to togglebetween uncompressed audio andMP3/WMA files.

CD-R or CD-RW Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The DVD Player supports:. Up to 255 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 15 playlists.. Up to 40 sessions.. Playlists with an .m3u or

.wpl extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or

.cda file extension.

The CD Player supports:. Up to 512 files and folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Playlists with an .m3u or

.wpl extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or

.cda file extension.


USB Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 700 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes.. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file

extension.. AAC files stored on an iPod.. FAT16. FAT32

Root Directory

The root directory of the disc istreated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays asF1 ROOT on the radio.

If a disc contains bothuncompressed CD audio and MP3/WMA files, a folder under the rootdirectory called CD accesses all ofthe CD audio tracks on the disc.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

No Folder

When the disc contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder.The next and previous folderfunction does not function ona disc that was recorded without

folders or playlists. When displayingthe name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

When the disc contains onlyplaylists and compressed audiofiles, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder.The folder down and the folder upbuttons search playlists first andthen goes to the root folder. Whenthe radio displays the name of thefolder the radio displays ROOT.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:. Playlists.. Files stored in the root directory.. Files stored in folders in the root

directory.


Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracksin each playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first trackin the first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen asthe default display. The new trackname displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treatedas special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or.pls file extension and are storedon a USB device may be supportedby the radio with a USB port.

Playing an MP3/WMA FileFrom a Disc (In Either the DVDor CD Slot)

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD(tracks only).

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMAfiles.

© SEEK: Press to go to thestart of the track, if more thanfive seconds have played. Press togo to the previous track if more thenfive seconds have played. Pressand hold or press multiple times tocontinue moving backward throughtracks.



s REV (Reverse): Press andhold to reverse playback quickly.Sound is heard at a reduced volumeand the elapsed time of the filedisplays. Releases REV toresume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thefile displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below Sc to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey belowc T to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

RDM (Random): Files on the disccan be listened to in random, ratherthan sequential order. To userandom, press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random Current Disc

displays to play songs in randomorder. Press the same softkey againto turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to play files inorder by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goes tothe next or previous artist in

alphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the artist displays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey located belowthe Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theback tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrowsand songs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.


Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod®

The USB Port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated in the center console.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port located in thecenter console. If the vehicle is onand the USB connection works,“OK to disconnect” and a GM logomay appear on the iPod and iPodappears on the radio's display. TheiPod music appears on the radio’sdisplay and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPod

automatically powers off and will notcharge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the AuxiliaryInput Jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” earlier for moreinformation.

Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs and displaysong information on the radio’sdisplay.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.



s REV (Reverse): Press andhold to reverse playback quickly.Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Releases REV toresume playing. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.


Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to use thatfunction.

j (Pause): Press the softkeybelow j to pause the track. The tabappears raised when pause is beingused. Press the softkey below jagain to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theback tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folder on theUSB drive. To browse and selectfiles:

1. Press the softkey belowc .

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the folder.If there is more than one folder,repeat Steps 1 and 2 until thefolder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the filesin the selected folder.


To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through

the list each time the softkey ispressed.





h (Music Navigator): Pressthe softkey belowh to view andselect a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres. Songs. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh .

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select the menu.

4. Turn f to scroll throughthe folders or files in theselected menu.







Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks. Thetab appears lowered when RepeatAll is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.

Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below> ,2 ,< or= to selectbetween Shuffle Off, Shuffle AllSongs/Shuffle Songs, ShuffleAlbum, or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): This is thedefault mode when a USB storagedevice or iPod is first connected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs / ShuffleSongs): Shuffles all songs on theUSB storage device or iPod.

< (Shuffle Album): Shufflesall songs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.


Auxiliary DevicesThe vehicle may have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack locatedon the lower right side of thefaceplate and for vehicles with aUSB port, it is located in the centerconsole.

Using the 3.5mm (1/8 in)Auxiliary Input Jack

The auxiliary input jack is located onthe lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do notplug a headphone set into the frontauxiliary input jack. Connect anauxiliary input device such as aniPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player,CD player, or cassette tape player,etc. to the auxiliary input jack foruse as another source for audiolistening.

Drivers are encouraged toset up any auxiliary devicewhile the vehicle is in P (Park).See Defensive Driving onpage 9‑2 for more informationon driver distraction.

To use an auxiliary input device,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.

O (Power/Volume): Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volumeof the portable player. Additionalvolume adjustments might have tobe made from the portable deviceif the volume is not loud or softenough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing, so you mightwant to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toselect between CD, or Auxiliary.. When a CD is in the player

the CD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber displays.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Pressto select between DVD, CD,or Auxiliary.. If an auxiliary input device is

not connected, “No Aux InputDevice” displays.

. When a disc is in either slot, theDVD/CD text tab and a messageshowing the track or chapternumber displays.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, and a disc is in boththe DVD slot and the CD slot theDVD/CD AUX button only cyclesbetween the two sources anddoes not indicate “No Aux InputDevice”.

. If a front auxiliary input device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUXbutton cycles through allavailable options.


If a disc is inserted into top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to only navigate theCD tracks through the remotecontrol.

See “Using the Auxiliary InputJack(s)” later in this section,or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑37 for moreinformation.

Using the USB Port

For vehicles with a USB port, theconnector is located in the centerconsole.

Radios with a USB port can controla USB storage device or an iPod®

using the radio buttons and knobs.See MP3 (Radio with CD and Radiowith CD/USB) on page 7‑23 orMP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) onpage 7‑29 for information abouthow to connect and control a USBstorage device or an iPod.

USB Supported Devices. USB Flash Drives. Portable USB Hard Drives. Fifth generation or later iPod. iPod nanos. iPod touch. iPod classic

Not all iPods and USB Drives arecompatible with the USB port.

Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple® for properoperation. iPod firmware can beupdated using the latest iTunes®

application. See www.apple.com/itunes.

For help with identifying your iPod,go to www.apple.com/support.

Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) SystemThe vehicle may have a DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system.The RSE system works with thevehicle's audio system. The DVDplayer is part of the front radio.The RSE system includes a radiowith a DVD player, a video displayscreen, audio/video jacks, twowireless headphones, and aremote control. See Operation onpage 7‑2 for more information onthe vehicle's audio/DVD system.


Before Driving

The RSE is designed for rear seatpassengers only. The driver cannotsafely view the video screen whiledriving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weatherconditions the RSE system might ormight not work until the temperatureis within the operating range. Theoperating range for the RSE systemis above −4°F (−20°C) or below140°F (60°C). If the temperature ofthe vehicle is outside of this range,heat or cool the vehicle until thetemperature is within the operatingrange of the RSE system.

Parental Control

The RSE system may have aParental Control feature, dependingon the radio. To enable ParentalControl, press and hold the radiopower button for more thantwo seconds to stop all systemfeatures such as: radio, videoscreen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.While Parental Control is on, Qdisplays.

When the radio is turned back on,Parental Control is unlocked.

Headphones

The RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones that arededicated to this system. Channel 1is dedicated to the video screen,while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSAselections. These headphones areused to listen to media such asCDs, DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As,radio, any auxiliary source

connected to A/V jacks, or theauxiliary input jack, if the vehiclehas this feature. The wirelessheadphones have an On/Off button,channel 1/2 switch, and a volumecontrol. Switch the headphones toOff when not in use.

Push the power button to turn onthe headphones. An indicator lightlocated on the headphones comeson. If the light does not come on,the batteries might need to bereplaced. Intermittent sound or staticon the headphones can also bean indication of weak batteries.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section for more information.

The headphones may automaticallyturn off after four hours ofcontinuous use.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volumecontrol located on the right side.


Infrared transmitters are locatedat the rear of the RSE overheadconsole. The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system and RSAare shut off or if the headphones areout of range of the transmitters formore than three minutes. Moving toofar forward or stepping out of thevehicle, can cause the headphonesto lose the audio signal.

For optimal audio performance, theheadphones must be worn correctly.Headphones should be worn withthe headband over the top of thehead for best audio reception.The symbol L (Left) appears on theupper left side, above the ear padand should be positioned on the leftear. The symbol R (Right) appearson the upper right side, above theear pad and should be positionedon the right ear.

Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will notbe covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool,dry place.

If the foam ear pads attached tothe headphones become worn ordamaged, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set.See your dealer/retailer for moreinformation.

Headphones should be stored in thefront floor console and not in thefront seat back pocket. Headphonedamage can occur when the secondrow seats are folded forward.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries on theheadphones:

1. Turn the screw to loosen thebattery door located on the leftside of the headphones. Slidethe battery door open.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery door andtighten the door screw.

If the headphones are to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.


Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

The A/V jacks, located on the rearof the floor console, allow audioor video signals to be connectedfrom an auxiliary device such asa camcorder or a video gameunit to the RSE system. Adapterconnectors or cables (not supplied)might be required to connect theauxiliary device to the A/V jacks.Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for proper usage.

The A/V jacks are color coded tomatch typical home entertainmentsystem equipment. The yellowjack (A) is for the video input. Thewhite jack (B) is for the left audioinput. The red jack (C) is for theright audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system, connect an externalauxiliary device to the color-codedA/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen poweron. If the video screen is in the DVDplayer mode, pressing the AUX(auxiliary) button on the remotecontrol, switches the video screenfrom the DVD player mode to theauxiliary device. The radio canlisten to the audio of the connectedauxiliary device by sourcing toauxiliary. See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑36 for more information.

How to Change the RSE VideoScreen Settings

The screen display mode (normal,full, and zoom), screen brightness,and setup menu language can bechanged from the on screen setupmenu by using the remote control.To change a setting:

1. Pressz .

2. Usen ,q , p ,o andr tonavigate and use thesetup menu.

3. Pressz again to remove thesetup menu from the screen.

Audio Output

Audio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following sources:. Wireless Headphones. Vehicle Speakers. Vehicle wired headphone jacks

on the rear seat audio system,if the vehicle has this feature.


The RSE system always transmitsthe audio signal to the wirelessheadphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlierin this section for more information.

The DVD player is capable ofoutputting audio to the wiredheadphone jacks on the RSAsystem, if the vehicle has thisfeature. The DVD player can beselected as an audio source on theRSA system. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑46 formore information.

When a device is connected to theA/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliaryinput jack, if the vehicle has thisfeature, the rear seat passengersare able to hear audio from theauxiliary device through the wirelessor wired headphones. The front seatpassengers are able to listen toplayback from this device throughthe vehicle speakers by selectingAUX as the source on the radio.

Video Screen

The video screen is located in theoverhead console. When the videoscreen is not in use, push it up intoits locked position.

To use the video screen:

1. Push the release button locatedon the overhead console.

2. Move the screen to the desiredposition.

If a DVD is playing and the screenis raised to its locked position, thescreen remains on; this is normal,and the DVD continues to playthrough the previous audio source.PressP on the remote control oreject the disc to turn off the screen.

The infrared receivers for thewireless headphones and theremote control are located at therear of the overhead console.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage mayoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreen” later in this section formore information.

Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim it atthe transmitter window at the rear ofthe overhead console and press thedesired button. Direct sunlight orvery bright light could affect theability of the RSE transmitter toreceive signals from the remotecontrol. If the remote control doesnot seem to be working, thebatteries might need to be replaced.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section. Objects blocking theline of sight could also affect thefunction of the remote control.


If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVDslot, the remote control O buttoncan be used to turn on the videoscreen display and start the disc.The radio can also turn on the videoscreen display. See Operation onpage 7‑2 for more information.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press to turn thevideo screen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press to turnthe remote control backlight on.The backlight automatically timesout after seven to ten seconds if noother button is pressed while thebacklight is on.

v (Title): Press to return the DVDto the main menu of the DVD. Thisfunction could vary for each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thenavigation arrows to move thecursor around the DVD menu. Aftermaking a selection press the enterbutton. This button only operateswhen using a DVD.

n ,q, p,o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press to select thechoice that is highlighted inany menu.

z (Display Menu): Press to adjustthe brightness, screen display mode(normal, full, or zoom), and displaythe language menu.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when the displaymenu or a DVD menu is active.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.Press twice to return to thebeginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press to startplaying a DVD. Press while a DVDis playing to pause it. Press again tocontinue playing the DVD.

When the DVD is playing,depending on the radio, play maybe slowed down by pressingsthen[ . The DVD continuesplaying in a slow play mode.Depending on the radio, performreverse slow play by pressingsthenr . To cancel slow play mode,

presss again.

t (Previous Track/Chapter):Press to return to the start of thecurrent track or chapter. Press againto go to the previous track orchapter. This button might not workwhen the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.


u (Next Track/Chapter): Pressto go to the beginning of the nextchapter or track. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press toquickly reverse the DVD or CD.To stop fast reversing a DVD video,presss . To stop fast reversing

a DVD audio or CD, releaser .This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fastforwarding a DVD video, presss .To stop fast forwarding a DVD audioor CD, release[ . This buttonmight not work when the DVD isplaying the copyright informationor the previews.

e (Audio): Press to change audiotracks on DVDs that have thisfeature when the DVD is playing.The format and content of thisfunction vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press to turnON/OFF subtitles and to movethrough subtitle options when aDVD is playing. The format andcontent of this function vary foreach disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switchthe system between the DVD playerand an auxiliary source.

d (Camera): Press to changecamera angles on DVDs that havethis feature when a DVD is playing.The format and content of thisfunction vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numeric keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.

\ (Clear): Press withinthree seconds after entering anumeric selection, to clear allnumerical inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Pressto select chapter or track numbersgreater than nine. Press this buttonbefore entering the number.

If the remote control becomes lostor damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.If this happens, make sure theuniversal remote control uses aToshiba® code set.


Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries:

1. Slide the rear cover back, on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery cover.

If the remote control is to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

No power. The ignition might not be turnedON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The picture does not fill the screen.There are black borders on the topand bottom or on both sides or itlooks stretched out.

Check the display mode settings inthe setup menu by pressing thedisplay menu button on the remotecontrol.

In auxiliary mode, the picture movesor scrolls.

Check the auxiliary inputconnections at both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is noobstruction between the remotecontrol and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make surethey are not dead or installedincorrectly.


Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)

Problem Recommended Action

After stopping the player, I pushPlay but sometimes the DVD startswhere I left off and sometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button was pressed onetime, the DVD player resumesplaying where the DVD wasstopped. If the stop button waspressed two times the DVD playerbegins to play from the beginning ofthe DVD.

The auxiliary source is running butthere is no picture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screen isin the auxiliary source mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at both devices.

Sometimes the wireless headphoneaudio cuts out or buzzes.

Check for obstructions, lowbatteries, reception range, andinterference from cellular telephonetowers or by using a cellulartelephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones areon correctly using the L (left) andR (right) on the headphones.

I lost the remote and/or theheadphones.

See your dealer/retailer forassistance.

The DVD is playing, but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screen issourced to the DVD player.

DVD Display Error Messages

The DVD display error messagedepends on which radio the vehiclehas. The video screen might displayone of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: Thismessage displays when there aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is present whentheZ EJECT button is pressed onthe radio.


DVD Distortion

Video distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE OverheadConsole

When cleaning the RSE overheadconsole surface, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video Screen

Use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whendirectly touching or cleaning thescreen, as damage could result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)SystemFor vehicles with Rear Seat Audio(RSA), rear seat passengers canlisten to and control any of themusic sources: radio, CDs, DVDs,or other auxiliary sources. The rearseat passengers can only controlthe music sources the front seatpassengers are not listening to(except on some radios where dualcontrol is allowed). For example,rear seat passengers can controla CD and listen to it through theheadphones, while the driver listensto the radio through the frontspeakers. The rear seat passengershave control of the volume for eachset of headphones.

The RSA functions operate evenwhen the main radio is off. The frontaudio system displaysX when theRSA is on, and disappears from thedisplay when it is off.

Audio can be heard through wiredheadphones (not included) pluggedinto the jacks on the RSA. If thevehicle has this feature, audio canalso be heard on Channel 2 of thewireless headphones.

The audio system mutes the rearspeakers when the RSA audio isactive through the headphones.

To listen to an iPod or portableaudio device through the RSA,attach the iPod or portable audiodevice to the front auxiliary input(if available), located on the frontaudio system. Turn the iPod on,then choose the front auxiliary inputwith the RSA SRCE button.


P (Power): Press to turn the RSAon or off.

Volume: Turn to increase or todecrease the volume of the wiredheadphones. The left knob controlsthe left headphones and the rightknob controls the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press to selectbetween the radio (AM/FM/XM™),CD, and if the vehicle has thesefeatures, DVD, front auxiliary, andrear auxiliary.

©¨ (Seek): Press to go to theprevious or to the next station andstay there. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to theradio.

Press and hold© or¨ untilthe display flashes to tune to anindividual station. The display stopsflashing after the buttons havenot been pushed for more thantwo seconds. This function isinactive, with some radios, if thefront seat passengers are listeningto the radio.

While listening to a disc, press¨to go to the next track or chapter onthe disc. Press© to go back to thestart of the current track or chapter(if more than ten seconds haveplayed). This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press© or¨ toperform a cursor up or down on themenu. Hold© or¨ to perform acursor left or right on the menu.


PROG (Program): Press to go tothe next preset radio station orchannel set on the main radio.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the radio.

When a CD or DVD audio disc isplaying, press PROG to go to thebeginning of the CD or DVD audio.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the disc.

When a disc is playing in the CD orDVD changer, press PROG toselect the next disc, if multiple discsare loaded. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press PROG to performthe ENTER menu function.

Phone

BluetoothVehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth capable cellphone with a Hands Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Thesystem can be used while the key isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft.).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones are guaranteedto work with the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem. See gm.com/bluetooth formore information on compatiblephones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.


Audio System

When using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes throughthe vehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein-vehicle Bluetooth system.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 for more information.

bg (Push To Talk) : Press toanswer incoming calls, to confirmsystem information, and to startspeech recognition.

cx (Phone On Hook): Press toend a call, reject a call, or to cancelan operation.

Pairing

A Bluetooth enabled cell phonemust be paired to the in-vehicleBluetooth system first and thenconnected to the vehicle before itcan be used. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,if available. Refer to the OnStarowner's guide for more information.

Pairing Information:. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. The in-vehicle Bluetooth systemautomatically links with the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder the phone was paired.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the in-vehicleBluetooth system at a time.

. Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the phone isdeleted.

To link to a different paired phone,see Linking to a Different Phonelater in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold bg fortwo seconds. The systemresponds with “Ready” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The systemresponds with “Bluetooth ready”followed by a tone.

3. Say “Pair”. The system respondswith instructions and a four digitPIN number. The PIN numberwill be used in Step 4.


4. Start the Pairing process on thecell phone that will be paired tothe vehicle. Reference the cellphone manufacturers user guidefor information on this process.

Locate the device named“General Motors” in the list onthe cellular phone and follow theinstructions on the cell phone toenter the four digit PIN numberthat was provided in Step 3.

5. The system prompts for a namefor the phone. Use a name thatbest describes the phone. Thisname will be used to indicatewhich phone is connected. Thesystem then confirms the nameprovided.

6. The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 foradditional phones to be paired.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones



3. Say “List”. The system lists allthe paired Bluetooth devices.If a phone is connected to thevehicle, the system will say“Is connected” after theconnected phone.

Deleting a Paired Phone



3. Say “Delete”. The system askswhich phone to delete followedby a tone.

4. Say the name of the phoneto be deleted. If the phone nameis unknown, use the “List”command for a list of all pairedphones. The system respondswith “Would you like to delete<phone name>? Yes or No”followed by a tone.

5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.The system responds with“OK, deleting <phone name>”.

Linking to a Different Phone




3. Say “Change phone”. Thesystem responds with “Pleasewait while I search for otherphones”.. If another phone is found,

the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected”.

. If another phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing Name Tags

The system can store up to thirtyphone numbers as name tags thatare shared between the Bluetoothand OnStar systems.

The system uses the followingcommands to store and retrievephone numbers:. Store. Digit Store. Directory

Using the Store Command

The store command allows a phonenumber to be stored withoutentering the digits individually.


2. Say “Store”. The systemresponds with “Store, numberplease” followed by a tone.

3. Say the complete phone numberto be stored at once with nopauses.. If the system recognizes

the number it responds with“OK, Storing” and repeatsthe phone number.

. If the system is unsure itrecognizes the phonenumber, it responds with“Store” and repeats thenumber followed by “Pleasesay yes or no”. If the

number is correct, say“Yes”. If the number is notcorrect, say “No”. Thesystem will ask for thenumber to be re-entered.

4. After the system stores thephone number, it responds with“Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds with “About to store<name tag>. Does thatsound OK?”.. If the name tag does not

sound correct, say “No” andrepeat Step 5.

. If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. Afterthe number is stored thesystem returns to themain menu.


Using the Digit Store Command

The digit store command allows aphone number to be stored byentering the digits individually.


2. Say “Digit Store”. The systemresponds with “Please say thefirst digit to store” followed bya tone.

3. Say the first digit to be stored.The system will repeat back thedigit it heard followed by a tone.Continue entering digits until thenumber to be stored is complete.. If an unwanted number is

recognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

. To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time andthe system will repeat them.

4. After the complete numberhas been entered, say “Store”.The system responds with“Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds with “About tostore <name tag>. Doesthat sound OK?”.. If the name tag does not

sound correct, say “No” andrepeat Step 5.

. If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. Afterthe number is stored thesystem returns to themain menu.

Using the Directory Command

The directory command lists all ofthe name tags stored by the system.To use the directory command:


2. Say “Directory”. The systemresponds with “Directory” andthen plays back all of the storedname tags. When the list iscomplete, the system returnsto the main menu.

Deleting Name Tags

The system uses the followingcommands to delete name tags:. Delete. Delete all name tags

Using the Delete Command

The delete command allows specificname tags to be deleted.


To use the delete command:


2. Say “Delete”. The systemresponds with “Delete, pleasesay the name tag” followed bya tone.

3. Say the name tag to be deleted.The system responds with“Would you like to delete, <nametag>? Please say yes or no”.. If the name tag is correct,

say “Yes” to delete thename tag. The systemresponds with “OK, deleting<name tag>, returning tothe main menu.”

. If the name tag is incorrect,say “No”. The systemresponds with “No. OK, let'stry again, please say thename tag.”

Using the Delete All Name TagsCommand

The delete all name tags commanddeletes all stored phone book nametags and route name tags forOnStar (if present).

To use the delete all name tagscommand:


2. Say “Delete all name tags”.The system responds with“You are about to delete allname tags stored in yourphone directory and your routedestination directory. Are yousure you want to do this? Pleasesay yes or no.”. Say “Yes” to delete all

name tags.. Say “No” to cancel the

function and return to themain menu.

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands:. Dial. Digit Dial. Call. Re-dial

Using the Dial Command


2. Say “Dial”. The system respondswith “Dial using <phone name>”.“Number please” followed bya tone.


3. Say the entire number withoutpausing.. If the system recognizes

the number, it respondswith “OK, Dialing” and dialsthe number.

. If the system does notrecognize the number, itconfirms the numbersfollowed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, Dialing” and dialsthe number. If the numberis not correct, say “No”.The system will ask for thenumber to be re-entered.

Using the Digit Dial Command


2. Say “Digit Dial”. The systemresponds with “Digit dial using<phone name>, please say thefirst digit to dial” followed bya tone.

3. Say the digit to be dialed one ata time. Following each digit, thesystem will repeat back the digitit heard followed by a tone.

4. Continue entering digits until thenumber to be dialed is complete.After the whole number hasbeen entered, say “Dial”. Thesystem responds with “OK,Dialing” and dials the number.. If an unwanted number is

recognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

. To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time andthe system will repeat them.

Using the Call Command


2. Say “Call”. The system respondswith “Call using <phone name>.Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.


3. Say the name tag of the personto call.. If the system clearly

recognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, calling,<name tag>” and dials thenumber.

. If the system is unsure itrecognizes the right nametag, it confirms the nametag followed by a tone.If the name tag is correct,say “Yes”. The systemresponds with “OK, calling,<name tag>” and dials thenumber. If the name tagis not correct, say “No”.The system will ask for thename tag to be re-entered.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the Re-dial Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. Thesystem responds with “Re-dialusing <phone name>” and dialsthe last number called from theconnected Bluetooth phone.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press bg and begin speakingto answer the call.

. Presscx to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

. Press bg to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press bg again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call,continue with the original callwith no action.

. Presscx to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.


Three-Way Calling

Three-Way Calling must besupported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless servicecarrier to work.

1. While on a call press bg . Thesystem responds with “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Three-way call”.The system responds with“Three-way call, please saydial or call”.

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press bg to link all the callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Presscx to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To Mute a call

1. Press bg . The systemresponds with “Ready” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Mute Call”. The systemresponds with “Call muted”.

To Cancel Mute


2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.The system responds with“Resuming call”.

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system andthe cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the CellPhone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:


2. Say “Transfer Call.” The systemresponds with “Transferring call”and the audio will switch fromthe vehicle to the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the In-VehicleBluetooth System

The cellular phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after thekey is turned to the ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY position.

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press bg for morethan two seconds. The audioswitches from the cell phone tothe vehicle.


Voice Pass-Thru

Voice Pass-Thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.This feature can be used to verballyaccess contacts stored in the cellphone.



3. Say “Voice”. The systemresponds with “OK, accessing<phone name>”.. The cell phone's normal

prompt messages will gothrough its cycle accordingto the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers and numbers storedas name tags during a call. This isused when calling a menu drivenphone system. Account numberscan be programmed into thephonebook for retrieval duringmenu driven calls.

Sending a Number During a Call


2. Say “Dial”. The system respondswith “Say a number to sendtones” followed by a tone.

3. Say the number to send.. If the system clearly

recognizes the number itresponds with “OK, SendingNumber” and the dial tonesare sent and the callcontinues.

. If the system is not sure itrecognized the numberproperly, it responds “DialNumber, Please say yes orno?” followed by a tone.If the number is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, Sending Number”and the dial tones are sentand the call continues.

Sending a Stored Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Send name tag.” Thesystem responds with “Say aname tag to send tones”followed by a tone.


3. Say the name tag to send.. If the system clearly

recognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, Sending<name tag>” and the dialtones are sent and the callcontinues.

. If the system is not sure itrecognized the name tagproperly, it responds “Dial<name tag>, Please sayyes or no?” followed by atone. If the name tag iscorrect, say “Yes”. Thesystem responds with “OK,Sending <name tag>” andthe dial tones are sent andthe call continues.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted outof the in-vehicle Bluetooth system,it will be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephonebook and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theabove sections on Deleting a PairedPhone and Deleting Name Tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for FCC information.

Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Rear Climate Control System(Rear ClimateControl Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Rear Climate Control System(Rear Climate with Rear SeatAudio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Fan Control



D. Air Conditioning


F. Recirculation

G. Rear Window Defogger

9 (Off): Turn the fan control all theway counterclockwise to turn thefront climate control system off.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed.

8-2 Climate Controls

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature of the air flowing fromthe system.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the current airflow mode.

By positioning the right knobbetween two modes, a combinationof those two modes is selected.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtowards the windshield and sidewindow outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some of the airdirected to the windshield, sidewindow, and second row flooroutlets. In this mode, the system

automatically selects outside air.Recirculation cannot be selectedwhile in floor mode.

- (Defog): This clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.When this mode is selected, thesystem turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning unless theoutside temperature is less than 4°C(40°F). Recirculation cannot beselected while in the defog mode.Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

0 (Defrost): This clears thewindshield of fog or frost, morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window vents,with some to the floor vents. In thismode, outside air is pulled insidethe vehicle. Recirculation cannot beselected while in the defrost mode.The air conditioning system runsautomatically in this setting, unlessthe outside temperature is less than4°C (40°F). Do not drive the vehicleuntil all the windows are clear.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes onwhen A/C is on. The air conditioningsystem does not operate when theoutside temperature is below 4°C(40°F). The indicator light flashesthree times and turns off whenoutside conditions affect airconditioning operation. This isnormal.

For quicker cool down on hot days:

1. Open the windows to let hot airescape.

2. SelectH mode.

3. Select# .

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

6. Close the windows after the hotair has escaped.

7. Once the vehicle's interiortemperature is below the outsidetemperature, select@ modefor faster cooling.


Using recirculation for long periodsof time could cause the air inside ofthe vehicle to become too dry. Toprevent this from happening, afterthe inside of the vehicle has cooled,turn the recirculation mode off.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, sowater might drip under the vehiclewhile idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. Anindicator light comes on whenrecirculation is on. When the engineis turned off, the recirculation modeautomatically turns off and must bere-selected when the engine isturned on again.

This mode recirculates and helps toquickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from enteringthe vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defrost, or defoggingmodes. If recirculation is selected inthese modes, the indicator flashesthree times and turns off. The airconditioning also comes on whenthis mode is activated unless theoutside air temperature is less than4°C (40°F). While in recirculationmode the windows can fog whenthe weather is cold and damp. Toclear the fog, select either the defogor defrost mode and increase thefan speed.

REAR (Rear Climate Control):Press to turn the rear heating andair conditioning on or off. See RearClimate Control System (RearClimate Control Only) on page 8‑10or Rear Climate Control System(Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio)on page 8‑11.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rear windowdefogger stays on for about10 minutes, before automaticallyturning off. The defogger will alsoturn off when the engine isturned off.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, fog or frost iscleared from the surface of themirror when< is pressed.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.


Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO

C. Defrost

D. Recirculation


F. Air Delivery Mode Control

G. Driver Side Temperature Control

H. Display

I. Power (On/Off)

J. Rear Window Defogger

K. Air Conditioning

L. PASS (Passenger)

M. Passenger Side TemperatureControl

Display Function

Each time the temperature, mode,or fan control buttons are pressed,the climate control display showsthat function along with the insidetemperature setting. The outsidetemperature is displayed on theinstrument panel cluster.

O (On/Off): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.While the system is off, outside airstill enters through the floor outlets,but the air delivery mode can beadjusted.

The climate control system will alsoturn on if either the fan control,defrost, AUTO, or air conditioningbuttons are pressed.


Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): The systemautomatically controls the insidetemperature, the air delivery, andthe fan speed.

To use automatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.

When AUTO is selected, thecurrent temperature(s) selectedand AUTO is shown on thedisplay. The current air deliverymode and fan speed alsoappear for approximatelyfive seconds.

When AUTO is selected, the airconditioning and air inlet areautomatically controlled. The airconditioning runs when theoutside temperature is over 4°C(40°F). The system isautomatically set to outside air,unless it is hot outside and thenthe air inlet changes torecirculation mode to help

quickly cool the vehicle. Therecirculation indicator light willcome on.

2. Set the temperature for thedriver and passenger.

To find a comfortable setting,start with a 22°C (73°F)temperature setting and allowabout 20 minutes for the systemto regulate. Use the driver's sideor passenger side temperaturebuttons to adjust thetemperature setting asnecessary. The system willremain at the selected setting.Choosing the warmest or coolesttemperatures does not cause thevehicle to heat or cool morequickly.

To avoid blowing cold air in coldweather, the system delaysturning on the fan until warm airis available. Press the fancontrol to override this delay andselect the fan speed.

Temperature Control

The driver and passenger sidetemperature buttons are used toadjust the temperature of the aircoming through the system. Thetemperature can be adjusted even ifthe system is turned off sinceoutside air still enters the vehicle,unless the recirculation mode isselected. See “Recirculation” later inthis section.

Driver Side TemperatureControl: Press the + or − buttonsto increase or decrease the driverside temperature. The driver sidetemperature display will show thetemperature setting.


Passenger Side TemperatureControl: Press the + or − buttonsto increase or decrease thepassenger side temperature. Thepassenger side display will show thetemperature setting.

PASS (Passenger): Press to setthe passenger temperature to matchthe driver temperature setting. ThePASS indicator will turn off. Whenthe passenger temperature settingis different than the driver setting,the PASS indicator comes on.

Manual Operation

The air delivery mode or fan speedcan be manually adjusted.

D / C (Fan Control): Press toincrease or decrease the fan speed.

Pressing D or C while in automaticcontrol places the fan speed undermanual control.

The air delivery mode remains inautomatic control. The fan settingstill displays, but the word AUTO nolonger displays, and the AUTObutton indicator light turns off.

H / G (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press to change thedirection of the airflow in the vehicle.Repeatedly press H or G until thedesired mode appears on thedisplay. Pressing a mode buttonwhile the system is off changes theair delivery mode without turning thesystem on. Press a mode buttonwhile in automatic control to placethe system into manual control.

The air delivery mode setting stilldisplays, but the word AUTO nolonger displays, and the AUTObutton indicator light turns off.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtowards the windshield and sidewindow outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some of the airdirected to the windshield, sidewindow, and second row flooroutlets. In this mode, the systemuses outside air.


- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.When this mode is selected, thesystem turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning compressorunless the outside temperature isless than 4°C (40°F). Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windows areclear.

0 (Defrost): Press to turn thedefrost on or off. This mode quicklyclears the windshield of fog or frost.Air is directed to the windshield,side window, and floor vents. In thismode, outside air is pulled insidethe vehicle. The air conditioningsystem runs automatically in thissetting, unless the outsidetemperature is less than 4°C (40°F).

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

While in defrost mode, if the PASSbutton is pressed, the PASS buttonindicator flashes three times toshow that the passenger climatecontrol system cannot be activated.If the passenger temperaturebuttons are adjusted while in defrostmode, the driver temperatureindicator will change. Thepassenger temperature will not bedisplayed.

When returning to bi-level, vent,or floor mode, the previoustemperature settings displays inplace of any change made while indefrost mode.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning (A/C) onand off. An indicator light comes onwhen A/C is on.

The A/C does not work when theoutside temperature is below 4°C(40°F). If# is pressed the indicatorflashes three times and turns off toshow that the A/C mode is notavailable. If the A/C is on and theoutside temperature drops below atemperature which is too cool for airconditioning to be effective, the A/Cindicator turns off to show that theA/C mode has been canceled.

On hot days, open the windowsbriefly to let hot inside air escape.This helps reduce the time it takesfor the interior of the vehicle tocool down.


The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, sowater might drip under the vehiclewhile idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. Anindicator light comes on whenrecirculation is on. When the engineis turned off, the recirculation modeautomatically turns off and must bere-selected when the engine isturned on again.

This mode recirculates and helps toquickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from enteringthe vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defog, or defrostingmodes. If recirculation is selected inthese modes, the indicator flashesthree times and turns off. The airconditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.While in recirculation mode thewindows can fog when the weather

is cold and damp. To clear the fog,select either the defog or defrostmode and increase the fan speed.

REAR: Press to turn the rearheating and air conditioning on oroff. See Rear Climate ControlSystem (Rear Climate Control Only)on page 8‑10 or Rear ClimateControl System (Rear Climate withRear Seat Audio) on page 8‑11.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rear windowdefogger stays on for about10 minutes, before turning off. Thedefogger also turns off when theengine is turned off. Do not drive thevehicle until all the windows areclear.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, fog or frost iscleared from the surface of themirror when the rear window defogbutton is pressed.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.


Sensors

The solar sensor, located in thedefrost grille in the middle of theinstrument panel, monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.

The interior temperature sensorlocated on the instrument panel tothe right of the steering column,measures the temperature of the airinside the vehicle.

There is also an exteriortemperature sensor located behindthe front grille. This sensor readsthe outside air temperature andhelps maintain the temperatureinside the vehicle. Any cover on thefront of the vehicle could cause afalse reading in the displayedtemperature.

The climate control system uses theinformation from these sensors tomaintain comfort settings byadjusting the temperature, fanspeed, and the air delivery mode.The system may also supply coolerair to the side of the vehicle facingthe sun. The recirculation mode willalso be used as needed to maintaincool outlet temperatures.


Rear Climate Control System (Rear ClimateControl Only)

A. Fan Control



For vehicles with the rear climatecontrol system, the controls arelocated on the rear of the centerconsole. The system can also becontrolled with the front controls.

Press the REAR button on the frontclimate control system to turn therear climate control system on oroff. An indicator comes on when therear system is on. The system alsoturns on if any of the rear controlsare adjusted.

Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control settings. It comes onwhen REAR is pressed.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings of the rearcontrols. It comes on when any rearcontrol is adjusted.

Fan Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turn theknob to9 to turn the fan off.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the airflowtemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnto the desired mode to change theairflow direction.

H (Vent): Air is directed throughthe overhead outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the rear floor outlets, aswell as the overhead outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed throughthe floor outlets. The rear systemfloor outlets are located under thethird row seats.


Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with RearSeat Audio)

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Control

C. Temperature Control

For vehicles with the rear climatecontrol system, the controls arelocated on the rear of the centerconsole.

Press the REAR button on the frontclimate control system to turn therear climate control system on oroff. The system also turns on if anyof the rear controls, except for theC are pressed. An indicator comeson when the rear system is on.

The system can also be turnedoff, by pressing and holding theC button.

Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control settings. It comes onwhen REAR is pressed.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings of the rearcontrols. It comes on when any rearcontrol is adjusted.

D C (Fan Control): Press the fanup or down buttons to increase ordecrease the fan speed.

Temperature Control: Press+ or − to increase or decrease theair temperature. The temperaturesettings will display in0-12 increments, going fromthe coolest (0) to the warmest(12) setting.


N (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press to manually change thedirection of the airflow. Repeatedlypress the button until the desiredmode appears on the display.

H (Vent): Air is directed throughthe overhead outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the rear floor outlets, aswell as the overhead outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed throughthe floor outlets. The rear systemfloor outlets are located under thethird row seats.

Air VentsUse the slider switch in the center ofthe outlet, to change the direction ofthe air flow. Use the thumbwheelnear the outlet to control the amountof air flow or to shut off the airflow.

Keep all outlets open wheneverpossible for best systemperformance.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatcan block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

. If fogging reoccurs while in ventor bi-level modes with mildtemperature throughout thevehicle, turn on the airconditioner to reduce windshieldfogging.

Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDefensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-10Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-22Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Ride Control SystemsStabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-32Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-39Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-39California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-40Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearyour safety belt, see Safety Belts onpage 3‑15.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show that almost40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving. Inrecent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.


Medical research shows that alcoholin a person's system can makecrash injuries worse, especiallyinjuries to the brain, spinal cord,or heart. This means that whenanyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — isin a crash, that person's chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems help tocontrol the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of thevehicle. See StabiliTrak System onpage 9‑27.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Lighton page 5‑18.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree-fourths of a second. But that isonly an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as twoor three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration. Buteven in three-fourths of a second, avehicle moving at 100 km/h(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). Thatcould be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enoughspace between the vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavy braking.Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a mistake. The brakes might nothave time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic followingdistances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.


If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

Steering

Power Steering

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Variable Effort Steering

The vehicle has a steering systemthat continuously adjusts the effortfelt when steering at all vehiclespeeds. It provides ease whenparking, yet a firm, solid feel athighway speeds.

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, andthen accelerate gently into thestraightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween parked cars and stops rightin front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking— if you canstop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because there isno room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform very well inemergencies like these. First applythe brakes. See Braking onpage 9‑3 . It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from acollision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.


An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy. Easeoff the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so thatthe vehicle straddles the edge of thepavement. Turn the steering wheel8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), aboutone-eighth turn, until the right front

tire contacts the pavement edge.Then turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.


The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try your best toavoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) helps avoid only thebraking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.


Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑36.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Going down steep or long hills,shift to a lower gear.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.


{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Top of hills: Bealert — something could be inyour lane (stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑25 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.


Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be in aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑6.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(two inches) on the side ofthe vehicle that is away fromthe wind to bring in fresh air.


. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)


Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when you


feel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle'straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph) asshown on the speedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑55.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any traction orstability system. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.

Release the accelerator pedal whileshifting, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. If the vehicledoes need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑82.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.


{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Example Label

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar) of your vehicle. Withthe driver's door open, you willfind the label attached below thedoor lock post (striker). The tireand loading information labelshows the number of occupant

seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacityweight (B) in kilograms andpounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10‑36 and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑42 .

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axle. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.


Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity foryour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 9‑48for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).


Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to your vehicle's tire andloading information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight and

seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to the rearedge of the driver's door.

The label shows the grossweight capacity of your vehicle.This is called the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). The


GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel,and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to aweigh station and weigh yourvehicle. Your dealer/retailer canhelp you with this. Be sure tospread out your load equally onboth sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle or the GAWR foreither the front or rear axle.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

Notice : Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

If you put things inside yourvehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else, theywill go as fast as the vehiclegoes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash,they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of your vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.


Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. If you have all-wheel drive,keep your speed at 88 km/h(55mph) or less for the first805 km (500miles).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See DrivingCharacteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑44 for thetrailer towing capabilities ofyour vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

In order to shift out of P (Park), theignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedalmust be applied.


Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer/retailer.

( (LOCK/OFF): This position locksthe ignition and transmission. Thekey can be removed in LOCK/OFF.

The shift lever must be in P (Park)to turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, then the vehicle needsservice.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This isthe position in which you canoperate the electrical accessories oritems plugged into the accessorypower outlets. This position unlocks

the ignition and steering wheel. Usethis position if the vehicle must bepushed or towed.

R (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel warning andindicator lights. The switch stays inthis position when the engine isrunning. The transmission is alsounlocked in this position. If youleave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This is the positionthat starts the engine. When theengine starts, release the key. Theignition switch will return to ON/RUNfor driving.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theignition key is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the windows and sunroofwill work up to 10 minutes or until adoor is opened.

The radio continues to work for10 minutes or until the driver's dooris opened.

For an additional 10 minutes ofoperation, close all the doors andturn the key to ON/RUN and thenback to LOCK/OFF.

All these features will work when thekey is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY positions.


Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key. The idle speed will slowdown as the engine warms. Donot race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART, cranking will be stoppedafter 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage. Toprevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switch tothe ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5-10 seconds, especially in verycold weather (below 0°F or−18°C), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in STARTfor up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.


If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat thesesteps. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer/retailer. If you do not, theengine might not performproperly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heatershould be plugged in at least fourhours before starting. Some modelsmay have an internal thermostat inthe cord which will prevent enginecoolant heater operation attemperatures above 0°F (−18°C).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord islocated on the driver side of theengine compartment. It is routedaround the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer/retailerin the area where you will beparking the vehicle for the bestadvice on this.


Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑44.

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑26 formore information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing the shiftlever all the way toward the frontof the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set before

you leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), hold theregular brake pedal down. Then,see if you can move the shift leveraway from P (Park) without firstpushing the button.

If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked inP (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).


Shifting Out of ParkThe vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released, and

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regularbrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑78 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift leverbutton again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), see your dealer/retailer.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.


Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.


{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑19.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑44.

AutomaticTransmissionThe automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑19. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑44.


Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply theregular brake first and then pressthe shift lever button before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting Out of Park onpage 9‑20.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑10.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. The

repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away. You candrive in L (Low) when you aredriving less than 56 km/h (35mph)and D (Drive) for higher speedsuntil then.


L (Low): This position gives youaccess to gear ranges. Thisprovides more engine braking butlower fuel economy than D (Drive).You can use it on very steep hills,or in deep snow or mud.

Manual Mode

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle's speed whiledriving down hill or towing a trailer.The vehicle has an electronic shiftposition indicator within theinstrument panel cluster. Whenusing the ERS Mode a number willdisplay next to the L, indicating thecurrent gear that has been selected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).

2. Press the plus/minus buttonlocated on the shift lever, toincrease or decrease the gearrange available.

When you shift from D (Drive) toL (Low), the transmission will shift toa pre-determined lower gear range .The highest gear available for thispre-determined range is displayednext to the L in the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) (With DICButtons) on page 5‑22 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) (WithoutDIC Buttons) on page 5‑28 formore information. The numberdisplayed in the DIC is the highestgear that the transmission will beallowed to operate in. This meansthat all gears below that number areavailable. For example, when4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L,1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle.The transmission will not shift into5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button isused or you shift back into D (Drive).

While in L (Low), the transmissionwill prevent shifting to a lower gearrange if the engine speed is toohigh. You have a brief period of timeto slow the vehicle. If vehicle speedis not reduced within the time

allowed, the lower gear range shiftwill not be completed. You mustfurther slow the vehicle, then pressthe − (Minus) button to the desiredlower gear range.

Automatic Engine Grade braking isnot available when the ERS isactive. It is available in D (Drive) forboth normal and Tow/Haul mode.While using the ERS, cruise controland the tow/haul mode can be used.See Tow/Haul Mode following.

Tow/Haul Mode_ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle mayhave a Tow/Haul mode.

The button is located on theinstrument panel under the climatecontrols.

Push the button to activate thesystem. Push it again to deactivatethe system. You can use this featureto assist when towing or hauling aheavy load.


When Tow/Haul is activated theTow/Haul symbol will come on theinstrument panel cluster. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑44 for more information.

Automatic Engine GradeBraking

Automatic Engine Grade Brakingassists when driving on a downhillgrade. It maintains vehicle speed byautomatically implementing a shiftschedule that uses the engine andthe transmission to slow the vehicle.The system will automaticallycommand downshifts to reducevehicle speed, until the brake pedalis no longer being pressed.

While in the Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) mode, grade brakingis deactivated, allowing the driver toselect a range and limiting thehighest gear available. Gradebraking is available for normaldriving and in Tow/Haul mode.

See Automatic Transmission onpage 9‑22.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveWith this feature, engine power isalways sent to all four wheels. It isfully automatic, and adjusts itself asneeded for road conditions.

When using a compact spare tire onan AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and disables AWD. To restoreAWD operation and preventexcessive wear on system, replacethe compact spare with a full-sizetire as soon as possible. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 10‑77for more information.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑19.


If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get too

close to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. The ABS pump or motormight be heard operating, and thebrake pedal might be felt to pulsate,but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, thenpush the parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Lighton page 5‑18.


Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the park brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will be on anda chime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see Trailer Towingon page 9‑48.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a Brake Assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsations orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. TheBrake Assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Ride Control Systems

StabiliTrak SystemThe vehicle has the StabiliTraksystem which combines antilockbrake, traction and stability controlsystems and helps the drivermaintain directional control of thevehicle in most driving conditions.

When you first start the vehicle andbegin to drive away, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto ensure there are no problems.The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle. Thesystem should initialize before thevehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).In some cases, it may takeapproximately 3.2 km (2 miles) ofdriving before the system initializes.

If the system fails to turn on oractivate, the StabiliTrak light alongwith one of the following messages


will be displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC):TRACTION CONTROL OFF,SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,SERVICE STABILITRAK. If theseconditions are observed, turn thevehicle off, wait 15 seconds, andthen turn it back on again to resetthe system. If any of thesemessages still appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), thevehicle should be taken in forservice. For more information on theDIC messages, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) (With DICButtons) on page 5‑22 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) (WithoutDIC Buttons) on page 5‑28.

The StabiliTrak light will flash on theinstrument panel cluster when thesystem is both on and activated.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working; this is normal.

The traction control disable button islocated on the instrument panelbelow the climate controls.

The traction control part ofStabiliTrak can be turned off bypressing and releasing the tractioncontrol disable button.

Traction control can be turned on bypressing and releasing the tractioncontrol disable button if notautomatically shut off for any otherreason.

When the traction control system isturned off, the StabiliTrak light andthe appropriate traction control offmessage will be displayed on theDIC to warn the driver. The vehiclewill still have brake-traction control

when traction control is off, but willnot be able to use the engine speedmanagement system. See “TractionControl Operation” next for moreinformation.

When the traction control systemhas been turned off, system noisesmay be heard and felt as a result ofthe brake-traction control working.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spin isrequired. See If the Vehicle is Stuckon page 9‑10.


Traction Control Operation

The traction control system is part ofthe StabiliTrak system. Tractioncontrol limits wheel spin by reducingengine power to the wheels (enginespeed management) and byapplying brakes to each individualwheel (brake-traction control) asnecessary.

The traction control system isenabled automatically when thevehicle is started. It will activate andthe StabiliTrak light will flash if itsenses that any of the wheels arespinning or beginning to losetraction while driving. If tractioncontrol is turned off, only thebrake-traction control portion oftraction control will work. Theengine speed management will bedisabled. In this mode, enginepower is not reduced automaticallyand the driven wheels can spinmore freely. This can cause thebrake-traction control to activateconstantly.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axleis allowed to spin excessivelywhile the StabiliTrak, ABS andbrake warning lights and anyrelevant DIC messages aredisplayed, the transfer case couldbe damaged. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Reduce engine powerand do not spin the wheel(s)excessively while these lights andmessages are displayed.

The traction control system mayactivate on dry or rough roads orunder conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning or abruptupshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this happens, areduction in acceleration may benoticed, or a noise or vibration maybe heard. This is normal.

If cruise control is being used whenthe system activates, the StabiliTraklight will flash and cruise control willautomatically disengage. Cruisecontrol may be reengaged whenroad conditions allow. See CruiseControl on page 9‑30.

StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines that aproblem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itselfafter restarting the vehicle, see yourdealer/retailer for service.


Cruise ControlWith cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more canbe maintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control is disengaged.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on left side of the steeringwheel.

T (On/Off): Press to turn cruisecontrol on and off. The indicatorcomes on when cruise control is on.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press to make the vehicleaccelerate or resume to a previouslyset speed.

SET– : Press to set the speed ormake the vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruisecontrol.

Setting Cruise Control

Cruise control will not work if theparking brake is set, or if the mastercylinder brake fluid level is low.

The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onafter the cruise control has been setto the desired speed.


{ WARNING

If you leave your cruise control onwhen you are not using cruise,you might hit a button and go intocruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want touse cruise control.

1. Press theI button.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Press and release theSET– button located on thesteering wheel.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged. But it does not need tobe reset.

Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h(25 mph) or greater, press the +RESbutton on the steering wheel. Thevehicle returns to the previously setspeed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

There are two ways to increase thevehicle speed while using cruisecontrol:. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, press the+RES button briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

There are two ways to reduce thevehicle speed while using cruisecontrol:. Press and hold the SET– button

on the steering wheel until thelower speed desired is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in very smallamounts, press the SET– buttonbriefly. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease vehicle speed. When youtake your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to thepreviously set cruise speed.


Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle speed down. When thebrakes are applied the cruise controlis disengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press the [ button.

. Press theT button.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speedmemory is erased when the cruisecontrol or the ignition is turned off.

Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,it operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph), and assists thedriver with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse). Thesensors on the rear bumper areused to detect the distance to anobject up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind thevehicle, and at least 25.4 cm (10 in)off the ground.

{ WARNING

The Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system does notreplace driver vision. It cannotdetect:

. objects that are below thebumper, underneath thevehicle, or if they are tooclose or far from the vehicle

. children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper carebefore and while backing; vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Even with URPA, alwayscheck behind the vehicle beforebacking up. While backing, besure to look for objects and checkthe vehicle's mirrors.


How the System Works

URPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 5 mph (8 km/h).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeps arecontinuous.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 25.4 cm (10 in) off the groundand below liftgate level. Objectsmust also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) fromthe rear bumper. This distance maybe less during warmer or humidweather.

The system can be disabled throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Park Assist” under VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑40 for more information.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

If the URPA system does notactivate due to a temporarycondition, the message PARKASSIST OFF displays on the DICwhen the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). This may occur underthe following conditions:. The driver disables the system.. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10‑86.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or a bicycle or an objectwas hanging out of the liftgateduring the last drive cycle. Oncethe attached object is removed,URPA will return to normaloperation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The vehicle's bumper isdamaged. Take the vehicle toyour dealer/retailer to repair thesystem.

. Other conditions may affectsystem performance, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck.

If the system is still disabled, afterdriving forward at least 25 km/h(15 mph), take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer.


Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have a Rear VisionCamera system. Read this entiresection before using it.

{ WARNING

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

. Detect objects that areoutside the camera's field ofview, below the bumper,or underneath the vehicle.

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the RVC screen, or usethe screen during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers orwhere there could be cross-traffic.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Your judged distances using thescreen will differ from actualdistances.

So if you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you could hit avehicle, child, pedestrian,bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death.Even though the vehicle has theRVC system, always checkcarefully before backing up bychecking behind and around thevehicle.

Vehicles Without NavigationSystem

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Whenthe key is in the ON/RUN positionand the driver shifts the vehicle intoR (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on the inside

rear view mirror. Once the drivershifts out of R (Reverse), the videoimage automatically disappearsfrom the inside rear view mirror.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem Off or On

To turn off the rear vision camerasystem, press and holdz , locatedon the inside rearview mirror, untilthe left indicator light turns off. Therear vision camera display is nowdisabled.

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on again, press and holdzuntil the left indicator lightilluminates. The rear vision camerasystem display is now enabled andthe display will appear in the mirrornormally.


Vehicles With NavigationSystem

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Whenthe driver shifts the vehicle intoR (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on thenavigation screen. Once the drivershifts out of R (Reverse), thenavigation screen will go back to thelast screen that had been displayed,after a delay.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press the MENU button to enterthe configure menu options, thenpress the MENU hard key toselect Display or touch theDisplay screen button.

3. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen displays.

4. Select the Video screen button.When the Video screen button ishighlighted the RVC systemis on.

The delay that is received aftershifting out of R (Reverse) isapproximately 10 seconds. Thedelay can be cancelled byperforming one of the following:. Pressing a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shifting in to P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

5 mph (8 km/h).

There is a message on the rearvision camera screen that states“Check Surroundings for Safety”.

Adjusting the Brightness andContrast of the Screen

To adjust the brightness andcontrast of the screen, press theMENU button while the rear visioncamera image is on the display. Anyadjustments made will only affectthe rear vision camera screen.

] (Brightness) : Touch the+ (plus) or – (minus) screen buttonsto increase or decrease thebrightness of the screen.


_ (Contrast) : Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the contrast ofthe screen.

Symbols

The navigation system may have afeature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the navigation screenwhile using the rear vision camera.The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist(URPA) system must not bedisabled to use the caution symbols.If URPA has been disabled and thesymbols have been turned on, theRear Parking Assist SymbolsUnavailable error message maydisplay. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9‑32.

The symbols appear when an objecthas been detected by the URPAsystem. The symbol may cover theobject when viewing the navigationscreen.

To turn the symbols on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.

2. Shift into P (Park).

3. Press the MENU hard key toenter the configure menuoptions, then press the MENUhard key repeatedly until Displayis selected or touch the Displayscreen button.

4. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen will display.

5. Touch the Symbols screenbutton. The screen button will behighlighted when on.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

Service Rear Vision CameraSystem: This message can displaywhen the system is not receivinginformation it requires from othervehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer/retailer.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located in the rearliftgate handle.


The area displayed by the camera islimited and does not display objectsthat are close to either corner orunder the bumper. The areadisplayed can vary depending onvehicle orientation or roadconditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screendiffers from the actual distance.

The following illustration shows thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The rear vision camera systemmight not work properly or display aclear image if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the Rear CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directly intothe camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.


. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer/retailer.

. There are extreme temperaturechanges.

The rear vision camera systemdisplay in the rearview mirror mayturn off or not appear as expecteddue to one of the followingconditions. If this occurs the leftindicator light on the mirror willflash.. A slow flash may indicate a loss

of video signal, or no videosignal present during the reversecycle.

. A fast flash may indicate that thedisplay has been on for themaximum allowable time duringa reverse cycle, or the displayhas reached an OverTemperature limit.

The fast flash conditions areused to protect the video devicefrom high temperatureconditions. Once conditionsreturn to normal the device willreset and the green indicator willstop flashing.

During any of these fault conditions,the display will be blank and theindicator will continue to flash aslong as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)or until the conditions return tonormal.

Pressing and holdingz when theleft indicator light is flashing will turnoff the video display along with theleft indicator light.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.


Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814 in theUnited States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or3.511 in Canada. Some gasolinescontain an octane-enhancingadditive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑40 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog-check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑16. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer/retailer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United States orCanada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs caused byuse of improper fuel would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines contain

only the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean,or if the vehicle experiencesproblems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline. Look for the TOP TIERlabel on the fuel pump to ensuregasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer/retailer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.


Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emission controlsystem could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do not

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

leave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle.

To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.


To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑86.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This would

allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑16.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer/retailer. The wrong type fuel capmight not fit properly, mightcause the malfunction indicatorlamp to light, and could damagethe fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑16.


Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer/retailer ortowing retailer for assistance withpreparing the vehicle for towing atrailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips.

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see Trailer Towing.

. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see TowingEquipment.


For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑82. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle — such as a motorhome,see Recreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑82.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this section

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

have been followed. Ask yourdealer/retailer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer whenequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. For traileringcapacity, see Trailer Towing onpage 9‑48. Trailering changeshandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy. Withthe added weight, the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies andtires are forced to work harder andunder greater loads. The trailer alsoadds wind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements. For safetrailering, correctly use the propertrailering equipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rules foryour safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling A Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements with state orprovincial police.

. Consider using sway control.See Towing Equipment onpage 9‑51.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 800 km (500 miles) thenew vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

. During the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This reduces wearon the vehicle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often.See “Tow/Haul Mode” later inthis section.


. Obey speed limit restrictionswhen towing a trailer.

. The vehicle is designed primarilyas a passenger and loadcarrying vehicle. If a trailer istowed, the vehicle will requiremore frequent maintenance dueto the additional load.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tiresand mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Tow/Haul Mode

Tow/Haul assists when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavyload. The purpose of the Tow/Haulmode is to:. Reduce the frequency and

improve the predictability oftransmission shifts.

. Provide the same solid shift feelas when the vehicle is unloaded.

. Improve control of vehicle speedwhile requiring less throttle pedalactivity.

. Increase the charging systemvoltage to assist in recharging abattery installed in a trailer.

Press this button located on theconsole to turn on and turn off theTow/Haul mode.

The Tow/Haul light on theinstrument panel comes on toindicate that Tow/Haul mode hasbeen selected.

Tow/Haul may be turned off bypressing the button again, at whichtime the indicator light on theinstrument panel will turn off. Thevehicle will automatically turn offTow/Haul every time it is started.


Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See Trailer Towing on page 9‑48.Tow/Haul is most useful whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load under the followingdriving conditions:. Travelling through rolling terrain.. Travelling in stop and go traffic.. Travelling in busy parking lots

where improved low speedcontrol of the vehicle is desired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerwill not cause damage but there isno benefit. Such a selection whenunloaded may result in unpleasantengine and transmission drivingcharacteristics and reduced fueleconomy.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument panel flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.


When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantwill boil at a lower temperature thanat normal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle may show signssimilar to engine overheating. To

avoid this, let the engine run whileparked, preferably on level ground,with the transmission in P (Park) fora few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 10‑18.

On a long uphill grade, shift downand reduce the vehicle speed toaround 88 km/h (55 mph) to reducethe possibility of the engine and thetransmission overheating.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.


Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine.. Shift into a gear.. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Schedule orIndex for more information. Thingsthat are especially important intrailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑18.

Trailer TowingThree important considerationshave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The total weight on the vehicle's

tires

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, specialequipment, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carrymust be considered. See “Weight ofthe Trailer Tongue” later in thissection for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.


Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

Front-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)

Front-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,250 lbs (4 649 kg)

All-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)

All-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,450 lbs (4 740 kg)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer/retailer for ourtrailering information or advice. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices onpage 13‑3 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The Gross

Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, which

will also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10


If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10-15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is2 495 kg (5,500 lbs); 1 270 kg(2,800 lbs) at the front axle and1 225 kg (2,700 lbs) at the rear axle.It has a GVWR of 3 266 kg(7,200 lbs), a RGAWR of 1 814 kg(4,000 lbs) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating) of6 350 kg (14,000 lbs). The trailerrating should be:

Expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (386 kg(850 lbs)) and because the weight is

applied well behind the rear axle,the effect on the rear axle is greaterthan just the weight itself, as muchas 1.5 times as much. The weight atthe rear axle could be 386 kg(850 lbs) X 1.5 = 578 kg (1,275 lbs).Since the rear axle already weighs1 225 kg (2,700 lbs), adding 578 kg(1,275 lbs) brings the total to1 803 kg (3,975 lbs). This is veryclose to, but within the limit forRGAWR as well. The vehicle is setto trailer up to 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs).

If the vehicle has many options andthere is a front seat passenger andtwo rear seat passengers with someluggage and gear in the vehicle aswell. 136 kg (300 lbs) could beadded to the front axle weight and181 kg (400 lbs) to the rear axleweight. The vehicle now weighs:


Weight is still below 3 266 kg(7,200 lbs) and you might think 318additional kilograms (700 lbs) shouldbe subtracted from the traileringcapacity to stay within GCWR limits.The maximum trailer would only be3 538 kg (7,800 lbs). You may gofurther and think the tongue weightshould be limited to less than 454 kg(1,000 lbs) to avoid exceedingGVWR. But the effect on the rearaxle must still be considered.Because the rear axle now weighs1 406 kg (3,100 lbs), 408 kg (900 lbs)can be put on the rear axle withoutexceeding RGAWR. The effect oftongue weight is about 1.5 times theactual weight. Dividing the 408 kg(900 lbs) by 1.5 leaves only 272 kg(600 lbs) of tongue weight that canbe handled. Since tongue weight isusually at least 10 percent of totalloaded trailer weight, expect that thelargest trailer the vehicle canproperly handle is 2 722 kg(6,000 lbs).

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Inflate the vehicle's tires to theupper limit for cold tires. Thesenumbers can be found on theCertification label or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10 for moreinformation. Do not go over theGVW limit for the vehicle, or theGAWR, including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using a weightdistributing hitch, do not go over therear axle limit before applying theweight distribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why the right hitch isneeded.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, then be sure to seal theholes when the hitch is removed.If the holes are not sealed, dirt,water, and deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from the exhaustmay get into the vehicle. SeeEngine Exhaust on page 9‑21.


Weight-Distributing Hitches andWeight Carrying Hitches

A. Body-to-Ground Distance

B. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the hitch must be adjusted sothat the distance (A) remains thesame both before and after couplingthe trailer to the tow vehicle.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not try to tap into thevehicle's hydraulic brake system.If you do, both brake systems willnot work well, or at all.

Trailer Wiring Harness

Basic Trailer Wiring

The trailer wiring harness, with aseven-pin connector, is located atthe rear of the vehicle and is tied tothe vehicle's frame. The harnessconnector can be plugged into aseven-pin universal heavy-dutytrailer connector available throughyour dealer/retailer.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Brown: Taillamps. Black: Ground. Light Green: Back-up Lamps. Red/Black: Battery Feed. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuse for this circuit is installedin the underhood electrical center,but the wires are not connected.


They should be connected by yourdealer/retailer or a qualified servicecenter.

If the back-up lamp circuit is notfunctional, contact your dealer/retailer.

If a remote (non-vehicle) battery isbeing charged, press the Tow/Haulmode switch located on the centerconsole near the climate controls.This will boost the vehicle systemvoltage and properly charge thebattery. If the trailer is too light forTow/Haul mode, turn on theheadlamps (Non-HID only) as asecond way to boost the vehiclesystem and charge the battery.

Electric Trailer Brake ControlWiring Provisions

These wiring provisions for anelectric trailer brake controller areincluded with the vehicle as part ofthe trailer wiring package. Theinstrument panel contains blunt cutwires behind the steering column forthe electric trailer brake controller.The harness contains the followingwires:. Red/Black: Power Supply. White: Brake Switch Signal. Gray: Illumination. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal. Black: Ground

The electric trailer brake controllershould be installed by your dealer/retailer or a qualified service center.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer/retailer first. Some electricalequipment can damage thevehicle and the damage wouldnot be covered by the vehicle'swarranty. Some add-on electricalequipment can keep othercomponents from working asthey should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle battery, even if the vehicle isnot operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑44 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑45.


2 NOTES

Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-12Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-18

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-20Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-25Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-26

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, andStoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Electrical SystemHigh Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Electrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-36Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

10-2 Vehicle Care

Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-54Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Secondary Latch System . . . 10-75Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-77

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-82Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer/retailer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inremote keyless transmitters, maycontain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories to the vehicle can affectvehicle performance and safety,including such things as airbags,braking, stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non-GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, arenot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

10-4 Vehicle Care

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer/retailer can accessorize thevehicle using genuine GMAccessories. When you go to yourGM dealer/retailer and ask for GMAccessories, you will know thatGM-trained and supported servicetechnicians will perform the workusing genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑45.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience, theproper replacement parts,and tools before attemptingany vehiclemaintenance task.

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information onpage 13‑13.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Airbag SystemCheck on page 3‑46.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑10.

Vehicle Care 10-5

HoodTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hood release handlewith this symbol on it. It islocated under the instrumentpanel on the driver's side of thevehicle.

2. At the front of the vehicle, pullup on the center of the hood,and push the secondary hoodrelease to the right.

3. After you have partially lifted thehood, gas struts willautomatically take over to lift andhold the hood in the fully openposition.

Before closing the hood, be sure allfiller caps are on properly.

Pull the hood down to close. Lowerthe hood until the lifting pressure ofthe strut is reduced. Then allow thehood to fall and latch into placeunder its own weight. Check tomake sure the hood is closed. If thehood does not fully latch, gentlypush the hood down at the front andcenter of the hood until it iscompletely latched.

10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10‑14.

B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap.See Cooling System onpage 10‑14.

C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑78.

D. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑30.

E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑78.

F. Power Steering Reservoir andCap (under engine cover). SeePower Steering Fluid onpage 10‑20.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 10‑8.

H. Engine Cover on page 10‑7.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑8.

J. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick. See “Checking theFluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 10‑11.

K. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 10‑22.

L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑12.

M. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑21.

Engine Cover

A. Oil Fill Cap

B. Engine Cover

To remove:

1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).

2. Raise the engine cover (B) torelease from the retainers.

3. Lift and remove the enginecover.

4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall engine cover.

10-8 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle mustbe on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is ayellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give theoil several minutes to drain backinto the oil pan. If this is notdone, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add atleast one quart/liter of therecommended oil. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.If the engine has so much oil thatthe oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that showsthe proper operating range, theengine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange in the cross-hatched area.Push the dipstick all the way back inwhen through.

Vehicle Care 10-9

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:

. GM6094M

Use only an oil that meets GMStandard GM6094M.

. SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. These numbers on anoil container show its viscosity,or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such asSAE 20W-50.

. American Petroleum Institute(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirementsshould have the starburstsymbol on the container. Thissymbol indicates that the oil hasbeen certified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oilidentified as meeting GMStandard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to usethe recommended oil can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature Operation

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30engine oil. Both provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. Always use an oilthat meets the requiredspecification, GM6094M. See “WhatKind of Engine Oil to Use” for moreinformation.

10-10 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Additives / EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the starburstsymbol that meet GM StandardGM6094M are all that is needed forgood performance and engineprotection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might not indicate that an oilchange is necessary for over a year.However, the engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once ayear and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your dealer/retailerhas trained service people who willperform this work using genuineparts and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

The Engine Oil Life Systemcalculates when to change theengine oil and filter based onvehicle use. Whenever the oil ischanged, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil changeis required. If a situation occurswhere the oil is changed prior to aCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage being turned on, reset thesystem.

If the vehicle does not have DriverInformation Center (DIC) buttons:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off. The vehiclemust be in P (Park) to accessthis display. Press the tripodometer reset stem until OILLIFE REMAINING displays.

2. Press and hold the trip odometerreset stem until OIL LIFEREMAINING shows 100%.Three chimes sound and theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.

Vehicle Care 10-11


If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message comes back onwhen the vehicle is started, theengine oil life system has notreset. Repeat the procedure.

If the vehicle has Driver InformationCenter (DIC) buttons:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays.

3. Press and hold the set/resetbutton until 100% is displayed.Three chimes sound and theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.


If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Recycle it by taking it to aplace that collects used oil.

Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer/retailer and have it repairedas soon as possible.

Change the fluid at the intervalslisted in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2, and be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmissionfluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑7.

10-12 Vehicle Care

The transmission fluid will not reachthe end of the dipstick unless thetransmission is at operatingtemperature. If you need to checkthe transmission fluid level, pleasetake the vehicle to your dealer/retailer.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at theMaintenance II intervals and replaceit at the first oil change after each80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter (awayfrom vehicle) to release loose dustand dirt. If the filter remains cakedwith dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Remove the engine cover. SeeEngine Cover on page 10‑7.

A. Ventilation Tube

B. Sensor

2. Disconnect the cover fitting fromthe ventilation tube (A).

3. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the sensor (B).

Vehicle Care 10-13

A. Clamp

B. Screws

C. Housing Cover

D. Filter

E. Base

4. Loosen the outlet ductclamp (A).

5. Loosen the six housingcover (C) screws (B).

6. Remove the housing cover (C)with outlet duct.

7. Remove the filter (D) and anyloose debris that may be foundin the base (E).

8. Inspect or replace the filter (D).

9. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 toreinstall the housing cover andreconnect the electricalconnector to the sensor.

10. Reinstall the engine cover. SeeEngine Cover on page 10‑7.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and theengine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off,and be careful working on theengine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, a backfire can cause adamaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which will damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

10-14 Vehicle Care

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Radiator Pressure Cap

C. Engine Cooling Fans

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km(30,000miles) or 24months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. The coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for five yearsor 240 000 km (150,000miles),whichever occurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑18.

Vehicle Care 10-15

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water to thecooling system can bedangerous. Plain water, or someother liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolantmixture will. The vehicle's coolantwarning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, theengine could get too hot but youwould not get the overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/oradditives are used in the vehicle'scooling system, the vehicle couldbe damaged. Use only the propermixture of the engine coolantlisted in this manual for thecooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 formore information.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the FULL COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant recovery tank, but be sure

10-16 Vehicle Care

the cooling system is cool beforethis is done. See Cooling System onpage 10‑14 for more information.

The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at or above theFULL COLD line marked on therecovery tank.

When the engine is hot, the levelcould be higher than the FULLCOLD line. If the coolant is belowthe FULL COLD line when theengine is hot, there could be a leakin the cooling system.

If the coolant is low, add the coolantor take the vehicle to a dealer/retailer for service.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at thecoolant recovery tank.

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the

(Continued)

Vehicle Care 10-17

WARNING (Continued)

cooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

1. Detach fasteners and lift off thepanel that covers theradiator cap.

2. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If you hear a hiss, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means thereis still some pressure left in thesystem.

3. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

4. Fill the radiator to the base ofthe filler neck with the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture.

5. When coolant begins to flow outof the filler neck, reinstall thepressure cap. Be sure to secureit tightly.

6. Fill the coolant recovery tank tothe FULL COLD mark.

7. Reinstall the cap on the coolantrecovery tank but leave theradiator pressure cap off.

10-18 Vehicle Care

8. Start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hosefeels warm. Any time during thisprocedure, watch out for theengine cooling fan(s).

9. If the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck is low, addmore of the proper DEX-COOLcoolant mixture through the fillerneck until the level is back up tothe base of the filler neck.Replace the pressure cap. Besure to secure it tightly.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gage on the instrumentpanel cluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 5‑12.

The vehicle may also display anENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE and ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINEmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Warning Lights,Gages, and Indicators onpage 5‑10.

You may decide not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑6.

If you do decide to lift the hood ,make sure the vehicle is parked ona level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catches firewhile driving with no coolant, thevehicle can be badly damaged.The costly repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑20 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

Vehicle Care 10-19

If Steam Is Coming From TheEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Turn it offand get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned.Stop the engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑20 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If No Steam Is Coming FromThe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. If in a traffic jam, shift toN (Neutral), otherwise, shift tothe highest gear whiledriving—D (Drive) or L (Low).

If the temperature overheat gage isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the car in frontof you. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is still

10-20 Vehicle Care

displayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”next in this section.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode letsthe vehicle be driven to a safe placein an emergency situation. If anoverheated engine condition exists,an overheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylindershelps prevent engine damage. Inthis mode, there is a significant lossin power and engine performance.The temperature gage indicates anoverheat condition exists. Drivingextended distances and/or towing atrailer in the overheat protectionmode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair. The

engine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑8.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir islocated under the engine cover onthe passenger side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak in thesystem or you hear an unusual

noise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Remove the engine cover. SeeEngine Cover on page 10‑7.

3. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

4. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should besomewhere between MAX and MINline on the dipstick in roomtemperature. If the fluid is on orbelow MIN line, you should add fluidclose to MAX Line.

Vehicle Care 10-21

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When adding windshield washerfluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If the vehicle will be operatingin an area where the temperaturemay fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

When the windshield washer fluidreservoir is low, a WASHER FLUIDLOW ADD FLUID message will bedisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Washer FluidMessages on page 5‑39 for moreinformation.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice:. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage yourwasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It candamage the vehicle'swindshield washer systemand paint.

10-22 Vehicle Care

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toan accident. When the brakewear warning sound is heard,have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer/retailer if the brakepedal does not return to normalheight, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Vehicle Care 10-23

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑18.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

10-24 Vehicle Care

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice:. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled onthe vehicle's paintedsurfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful notto spill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑78 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Vehicle Care 10-25

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑26.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer/retailer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlSystem Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑26.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition to ON/RUN, but do notstart the engine. Withoutapplying the regular brake, try tomove the shift lever out ofP (Park) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of P (Park),contact your dealer/retailer forservice.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.

10-26 Vehicle Care

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. To replace the wiperblade assembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiper armaway from the windshield.

2. Press the button in the middle ofthe wiper arm connector and pullthe wiper blade away from thearm connector.

3. Install the new wiper blade andmake sure the wiper blade locksinto place.

Vehicle Care 10-27

For the proper size and type seeMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑9.

Backglass Wiper Blade

To replace the backglass wiperblade:

1. Pull the wiper blade assemblyaway from the backglass.

The backglass wiper blade willnot lock in a vertical position socare should be used whenpulling it away from the vehicle.

2. Rotate the wiper bladeassembly, hold the wiper arm inposition, and push the bladeaway from the wiper arm.

3. Replace the wiper blade.

4. Return the wiper arm and bladeassembly to the rest position onthe glass.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatyou take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑29.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

10-28 Vehicle Care

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, andStoplamps

A. Sidemarker Lamp

B. Taillamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgateon page 2‑9 .

2. Remove the convenience net,if the vehicle has one.

3. Remove the two taillamp nutcovers.

4. Remove the two nuts holding thetaillamp assembly in place.

5. Pull out the taillamp assembly.

6. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull itstraight out to remove it from thetaillamp assembly.

7. Pull the old bulb straight out ofthe bulb socket.

8. Push the new bulb straight intothe bulb socket until it connects.

Vehicle Care 10-29

9. Push the taillamp assembly backinto its original location.

When reinstalling the taillampassembly, make sure the pin onthe taillamp assembly lines upand is inserted correctly into theopening of the vehicle.

10. Reinstall the two nuts that holdthe taillamp assembly in place.

11. Reinstall the two taillamp nutcovers.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

RearSidemarker Lamp

194

Rear Turn Signaland Taillamps

7443(W21/5W)

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer/retailer.

Electrical System

High Voltage Devices andWiring

{ WARNING

Exposure to high voltage cancause shock, burns, and evendeath. The high voltage systemsin your vehicle can only beserviced by technicians withspecial training.

High voltage devices areidentified by labels. Do notremove, open, take apart,or modify these devices. Highvoltage cable or wiring hasorange covering. Do not probe,tamper with, cut, or modify highvoltage cable or wiring.

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and other

Power Accessories

10-30 Vehicle Care

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice, maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicleare protected from short circuits bya combination of fuses, circuitbreakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance offires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is locatedin the engine compartment, on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical components on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

To remove fuses, hold the end ofthe fuse between your thumb andindex finger and pull straight out.

Vehicle Care 10-31

Fuses Usage

A/C CLUTCH Air ConditioningClutch

ABS MTRAntilock BrakingSystem (ABS)Motor

AFSAdaptive ForwardLighting System

AIRBAG Airbag System

AUX POWER Auxiliary Power

AUXVAC PUMP

AuxiliaryVacuum Pump

AWD All-Wheel-DriveSystem

BATT 1 Battery 1

BATT 2 Battery 2

BATT 3 Battery 3

ECMEngine ControlModule

ECM 1Engine ControlModule 1

EMISSION 1 Emission 1

10-32 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

EMISSION 2 Emission 2

EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

FSCMFuel SystemControl Module

HORN Horn

HTD MIRHeated OutsideRearview Mirror

HVAC BLWR

Heating, Ventilationand AirConditioningBlower

LT HI BEAMLeft High-BeamHeadlamp

LT LO BEAMLeft Low-BeamHeadlamp

LT PRK Left Parking Lamp

Fuses Usage

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp and TurnSignal

ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils

PCM IGNPowertrain ControlModule Ignition

PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate

PWROUTLET Power Outlet

REARCAMERA

Rear Camera

RR APO Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

RR DEFOG Rear Defogger

RR HVACRear ClimateControl System

RT HI BEAMRight High-BeamHeadlamp

RT LO BEAMRight Low-BeamHeadlamp

Fuses Usage

RT PRK RightParking Lamp

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp and TurnSignal

RVC SNSRRegulated VoltageControl Sensor

S/ROOF/SUNSHADE Sunroof

SERVICE Service Repair

SPARE Spare

Stop Lamps(China Only)


STRTR Starter

TCMTransmissionControl Module

TRANS Transmission

TRLRBCK/UP

Trailer Back-upLamps

TRLR BRK Trailer Brake

Vehicle Care 10-33

Fuses Usage

TRLRPRK LAMP

Trailer ParkingLamps

TRLR PWR Trailer Power

WPR/WSWWindshield Wiper/Washer

Relays Usage

A/CCMPRSRCLTCH

Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

AUXVAC PUMP

AuxiliaryVacuum Pump

CRNK Switched Power

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

HI BEAMHigh-BeamHeadlamps

Relays Usage

HID/LO BEAM

High IntensityDischarge (HID)Low-BeamHeadlamps

HORN Horn

IGN Ignition Main

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp and TurnSignal Lamp

PRK LAMP Park Lamp

PWR/TRN Powertrain

RR DEFOG Rear WindowDefogger

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp and TurnSignal Lamp



Relays Usage

TRLRBCK/UP

Trailer Back-upLamps

WPR Windshield Wiper

WPR HIWindshield WiperHigh Speed

Instrument Panel FuseBlockThe instrument panel fuse block islocated under the instrument panelon the passenger side of thevehicle. Pull down on the cover toaccess the fuse block.

10-34 Vehicle Care

Fuse Side

Fuses Usage

AIRBAG Airbag

AMP Amplifier

BCK/UP/STOP

Back-up Lamp/Stoplamp

BCMBody ControlModule

CNSTR/VENT

Canister Vent

CTSY Courtesy

DR/LCK Door Locks

DRLDaytime RunningLamps

DRL 2GMC HID Only/Rear FogLamps-China Only

DSPLY Display

FRT/WSWFront WindshieldWasher

HTD/COOL SEAT

Heated/CoolingSeats

Fuses Usage

HVACHeating, Ventilationand AirConditioning

INADV/PWR/LED

InadvertentPower LED

INFOTMNT Infotainment

LT/TRN/SIGDriver Side TurnSignal

MSMMemory SeatModule

PDMPower Mirrors,Liftgate Release

PWR MODE Power Mode

PWR/MIR Power Mirrors

RDO Radio

REAR WPR Rear Wiper

RT/TRN/SIGPassenger SideTurn Signal

SPARE Spare

STR/WHL/ILLUM

Steering WheelIllumination

Vehicle Care 10-35

Relay Side

Relays Usage

LT/PWR/SEAT

Driver Side PowerSeat Relay

RT/PWR/SEAT

Passenger SidePower Seat Relay

PWR/WNDWPower WindowsRelay

PWR/COLUMN

Power SteeringColumn Relay

L/GATE Liftgate Relay

LCK Power Lock Relay

REAR/WSWRear WindowWasher Relay

Relays Usage

UNLCK Power UnlockRelay

DRL2Daytime RunningLamps 2 Relay

LT/UNLCKDriver Side UnlockRelay

DRLDaytime RunningLamps Relay

SPARE Spare

FRT/WSWFront WindshieldWasher Relay

10-36 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. If youever have questions about yourtire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details. Foradditional information refer tothe tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

. Overloading your tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Youcould have an air-out and aserious accident. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when yourtires are cold. See TirePressure on page 10‑42.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured orbroken by a suddenimpact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn, old tires can causeaccidents. If your tread isbadly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged,replace them.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

Vehicle Care 10-37

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is the

Tire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑52 .

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life ofapproximately 5 000 km(3,000 miles) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when aregular road tire has lost air andgone flat.

10-38 Vehicle Care

If your vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire on page 10‑77 and If a TireGoes Flat on page10‑56 .

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑42 .

(F) Tire Size : A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following illustration showsan example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

Vehicle Care 10-39

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carry capacity a tire is

certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).

Accessory Weight: Thismeans the combined weight ofoptional accessories. Someexamples of optionalaccessories are, automatictransmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows,power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑42 .

10-40 Vehicle Care

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10 .

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10 .

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10 .

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10 .

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Vehicle Care 10-41

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑42 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10 .

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the tread

of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 inch) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑49 .

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑52 .

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10 .

10-42 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle'scapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10 .

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under-inflation orover-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under-inflation),you can get the following:. Too much flexing. Too much heat. Tire overloading. Premature orirregular wear

. Poor handling

. Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air(over-inflation), you can getthe following:. Unusual wear. Poor handling. Rough ride. Needless damage fromroad hazards

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle. Thislabel shows your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportyour vehicle's maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight yourvehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10 . Howyou load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

Vehicle Care 10-43

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Do not forget to checkthe compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one. The compactspare should be at 60 psi(420 kPa). For additionalinformation regarding thecompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑77 .

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegage to check tire pressure. Youcannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are under-inflated. Checkthe tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregage firmly onto the valve to geta pressure measurement. If thecold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stem inthe center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keepingout dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your vehicle'stires and transmit tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in thevehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

10-44 Vehicle Care

pressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑44 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry and Science Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for information regardingPart 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industryand Science Canada.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly, if the vehiclehas one. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in thevehicle's tires and transmits the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

Vehicle Care 10-45

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument panelcluster.

At the same time a message tocheck the pressure in a specific tireappears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display. The low tirepressure warning light and the DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed bythe driver. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) onpage 5‑22 or Driver Information

Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)on page 5‑37 and Tire Messageson page 5‑37.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressure for yourvehicle's tires when they are cold.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location on your vehicle.Also see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑42.

Your vehicle's TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑48, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑48 and Tires onpage 10‑36.

Notice: Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use theGM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer/retailer.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑58 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

10-46 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message isalso displayed. The low tire warninglight and DIC warning messagecome on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light and DIC messageto come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire,if your vehicle has one. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The TPMSmalfunction light and DICmessage should go off once youre-install the road tire containingthe TPMS sensor.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was started but notcompleted or not completedsuccessfully after rotating thevehicle's tires. The DIC messageand TPMS malfunction lightshould go off once the TPMSsensor matching process isperformed successfully. See“TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The DICmessage and the TPMSmalfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer/retailer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle's originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑50.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer/retailerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any time yourotate your vehicle's tires or replaceone or more of the TPMS sensors,the identification codes will need tobe matched to the new tire/wheelposition. The sensors are matchedto the tire/wheel positions in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side reartire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer/retailer for service.

Vehicle Care 10-47

The TPMS sensors can also bematched to each tire/wheel positionby increasing or decreasing thetire's air pressure. If increasing thetire's air pressure, do not exceedthe maximum inflation pressureindicated on the tire's sidewall.

To decrease air-pressure out of atire you can use the pointed end ofthe valve cap, a pencil-style airpressure gage, or a key.

You have two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takes longerthan two minutes, to match the firsttire and wheel, or more thanfive minutes to match all four tireand wheel positions the matchingprocess stops and you need tostart over.

The TPMS sensor matching processis outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the engine off.

3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter's LOCK andUNLOCK buttons at the sametime for approximatelyfive seconds. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiver is inrelearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Remove the valve cap from thevalve cap stem. Activate theTPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire's air pressurefor five seconds, or until a hornchirp sounds. The horn chirp,which may take up to30 seconds to sound, confirmsthat the sensor identificationcode has been matched to thistire and wheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.

10-48 Vehicle Care

Tire InspectionWe recommend that youregularly inspect your vehicle'stires, including the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, for signsof wear or damage. See When ItIs Time for New Tires onpage 10‑49 for more information.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to13 000 km). See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 .

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soon aspossible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires onpage 10‑49 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑54 .

When rotating the vehicle's tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, do not include it in thetire rotation.

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and rearinflation pressures as shown onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑42 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10 .

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑44 .

Make certain that all wheel nutsare properly tightened. See“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 .

Vehicle Care 10-49

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑56.

Make sure the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and then tryto rotate or turn the tire. If itmoves, tighten the cable. SeeTire Changing on page 10‑66 .

When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures, drivingspeeds, vehicle loading, and roadconditions influence when you neednew tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) orless of tread remaining.

The vehicle needs new tires if anyof the following statements are true:. You can see the indicators at

three or more places aroundthe tire.

. You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall is cracked,cut, or snagged deep enough toshow cord or fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannot berepaired well because of the sizeor location of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades overtime. This is also true for the sparetire, if the vehicle has one, even if itis not being used. Multipleconditions affect how fast this agingtakes place, including temperatures,loading conditions, and inflationpressure maintenance. With proper

10-50 Vehicle Care

care and maintenance tires typicallywear out before they degrade due toage. If you are unsure about theneed to replace the tires as they getolder, consult the tire manufacturerfor more information.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle.The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when itwas new, were designed to meetGeneral Motors TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you get tireswith the same TPC Spec rating.This way, your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that aredesigned to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as theoriginal tires.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of yourvehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by an MS formud and snow. See TireSidewall Labeling on page 10‑36for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tireswill help keep your vehicleperforming most like it did whenthe tires were new. Replacingless than a full set of tires canaffect the braking and handlingperformance of your vehicle.

See Tire Inspection on page 10‑48and Tire Rotation on page10‑48for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving.If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handleproperly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types mayalso cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels. It is allright to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, asit was developed for use onyour vehicle. See CompactSpare Tire on page 10‑77 .

Vehicle Care 10-51

{ WARNING

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace yourvehicle's tires with those that donot have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as yourvehicle's original tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed onyour vehicle. Non-TPC Spec

rated tires may give alow-pressure warning that ishigher or lower than the properwarning level you would get withTPC Spec rated tires. See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10‑43 .

Your vehicle's originalequipment tires are listed on theTire and Loading InformationLabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10 , for moreinformation about the Tire andLoading Information Label andits location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are adifferent size than your originalequipment wheels and tires, thiscould affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, rideand handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.

Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as anti-lockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{ WARNING

If you add different sized wheels,your vehicle may not provide anacceptable level of performanceand safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash andsuffer serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for your vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑50 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.

10-52 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls of

most passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of25 to 30 cm (10 to 12 inches),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices, anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Vehicle Care 10-53

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate

and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.It should be noted that thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels on the vehiclewere aligned and balanced carefullyat the factory to give the longest tirelife and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if thereis unusual tire wear or the vehiclepulls to one side or the other, thealignment should be checked. If thevehicle vibrates when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced. Seeyour dealer/retailer for properdiagnosis.

10-54 Vehicle Care

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it(except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer/retailer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know thekind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

If you need to replace any of thewheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors, replace them onlywith new GM original equipmentparts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors forthe vehicle.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose airand make you lose control. Youcould have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑56 for more information.

Vehicle Care 10-55

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used orhow far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause acrash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow that

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

manufacturer's instructions. Tohelp avoid damage to the vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or removethe device if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin thevehicle's wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, installthem on the front tires.

10-56 Vehicle Care

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle's tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It maybe very bumpy and noisy, but youcan still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road if possible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment and

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

training. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑3.

Vehicle Care 10-57

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fall onyou or other people. You and theycould be badly injured or evenkilled. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help preventthe vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

To be certain the vehicle will notmove, put blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away fromthe one being changed. Thatwould be the tire on the otherside, at the opposite end of thevehicle.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tiresafely, follow the instructions below.Then see Tire Changing onpage 10‑66. To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑58.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

10-58 Vehicle Care

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.

{ WARNING

Over-inflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) inthe tread area of the tire. It can alsobe used to inflate an underinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑6.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

Vehicle Care 10-59

This vehicle may have one of thefollowing tire sealant andcompressor kits. The kit includes:

A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air orAir Only)

B. On/Off Button

C. Pressure Gage

D. Pressure Deflation Button(If equipped)

E. Tire Sealant Canister

F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

G. Air Only Hose (Black)

H. Power Plug

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal andInstallation of the Sealant Canister”following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

10-60 Vehicle Care

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for 5 minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

Always do a safety check first. SeeIf a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑56.Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑65.

Vehicle Care 10-61

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets onpage 5‑9 .

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)counterclockwise to the Sealant+ Air position.

9. Press the on/off (B) button toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gage (C) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregage (C). The recommendedinflation pressure can be found

on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑42.

The pressure gage (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program onpage 13‑6.

10-62 Vehicle Care

11. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire,therefore, Steps 12 through18 must be done immediatelyafter Step 11.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/airhose (F), and the powerplug (H) back in their originallocation.

16. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister (E) and placeit in a highly visible location.The label is a reminder not toexceed 55 mph (90 km/h) untilthe damaged tire is repaired orreplaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle5 miles (8 km) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1 through 11 under“Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 10 psi (68 kPa)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑6.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 10 psi(68 kPa) from therecommended inflationpressure, inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

Vehicle Care 10-63

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (E) and sealant/airhose (F) assembly at a localdealer/retailer or in accordancewith local state codes andpractices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer/retailer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealer/retailer within a 100 miles(161 km) of driving to have thetire repaired or replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

Always do a safety check first. SeeIf a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑56.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑65.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H).

10-64 Vehicle Care

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (G) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets onpage 5‑9 .

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)clockwise to the Air Onlyposition.

9. Press the on/off (B) button toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregage (C). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑42.

The pressure gage (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure isreached.

If you inflate the tire higherthan the recommendedpressure you can adjust theexcess pressure by pressingthe pressure deflationbutton (D), if equipped, until theproper pressure reading isreached. This option is onlyfunctional when using the aironly hose (G).

Vehicle Care 10-65

11. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air onlyhose (G) from the tire valvestem, by turning itcounterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H) andcord back in its originallocation.

15. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter located ina compartment on the bottom of itshousing that may be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

2. Press the canister releasebutton.

3. Pull up and remove the canister.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer/retailer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitThe tire sealant and compressor kitis located in the storagecompartment on the driver side, atthe rear of the vehicle.

10-66 Vehicle Care

1. Press down on the latch tab andpull the cover off to access thestorage compartment.

2. Press the two tabs on the quickrelease buckle to release the tiresealant and compressor kitstrap.

3. Remove the sealant andcompressor kit from its tray.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Tire Changing

Removing Tools

The tools needed to remove thespare tire are located in the storagecompartment on the driver side, atthe rear of the vehicle.

1. Open the jack storagecompartment by pulling on thelatch tab, located toward the rearof the vehicle, and pulling thecover off. A. Tool Bag

B. Wing Bolt

C. Jack

2. Remove the wing bolt (B) byturning it counterclockwise

3. Push the jack (C) up out of theholding bracket.

4. Turn the jack on its side, with thebottom facing toward you.

5. Pull the jack straight out, bottomfirst.

Vehicle Care 10-67

The tools you will be using includethe jack (A) and lug wrench (B).

Removing the Spare Tire

The compact spare tire is locatedunder the vehicle, in front of the rearbumper. See Compact Spare Tireon page 10‑77 for more informationabout the compact spare.

A. Rear Convenience Center

B. Lug Wrench

C. Storage Compartment Cap Hole

D. Hoist Shaft

E. Compact Spare Tire

F. Retainer

G. Hoist Shaft Assembly

1. Open the storage compartmentdoor of the convenience centerthat is nearest the liftgate andremove the cap on the bottom ofthe storage compartment.

2. Open the carpet cutout that islocated through the hole of thestorage compartment.

3. Attach the lug wrench into thehoist shaft.

4. Turn the lug wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue turning the wrench untilthe spare tire can be pulled outfrom under the vehicle.

10-68 Vehicle Care

5. Tilt the retainer and slip itthrough the wheel opening toremove the spare tire from thecable.

6. Turn the wrench clockwise toraise the cable back up afterremoving the spare tire.

Do not store a full-size or a flatroad tire under the vehicle. See“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools” later in this section.

To continue changing the flat tire,see “Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” later in thissection.

If the spare tire will not lower, thesecondary latch could be engaged.

Do the following to check the cable:

1. Check under the vehicle to see ifthe cable is visible.

2. If it is not visible, see SecondaryLatch System on page 10‑75.

If it is visible, first try to tightenthe cable by turning the lugwrench clockwise until you heartwo clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot over-tighten thecable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning thewrench counterclockwise threeor four turns.

4. If the spare tire has not lowered,tighten the cable all the way andthen loosen it at least two times.

If the spare tire did lower to theground, continue with Step 5under “Removing the Spare Tire(Vehicles with the RearConvenience Center)” listedpreviously.

Vehicle Care 10-69

5. If you still cannot lower the sparetire to the ground, seeSecondary Latch System onpage 10‑75.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑56 for moreinformation.

2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover,loosen the plastic nut caps withthe wheel wrench. They will notcome off. Then, using the flatend of the wheel wrench, pryalong the edge of the cover untilit comes off. Be careful; theedges may be sharp. Do not tryto remove the cover with yourbare hands.

Store the wheel cover securelyin the rear of the vehicle untilyou have the flat tire repaired orreplaced.

If the vehicle has aluminumwheels, remove the wheel nutcaps using the wheel wrench.

3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but donot remove them — using thelug wrench. For wheels with awheel lock key, use the wheellock key between the lock nutand lug wrench. The key issupplied in the front passengerdoor pocket.

Notice: If this vehicle has wheellocks and an impact wrench isused to remove the wheel nuts,the lock nut or wheel lock keycould be damaged. Do not use animpact wrench to remove thewheel nuts if this vehicle haswheel locks.

4. To identify the appropriatejacking location, find thetriangle (A) about 12 inches(30.5 cm) from the front tireor (B) about 10.5 inches (27 cm)from the rear tire.

The triangle is located near eachwheel on the vehicle's exterior.

10-70 Vehicle Care

Notice: If a jack is used to raisethe vehicle without positioning itcorrectly, the vehicle could bedamaged. When raising thevehicle on a jack, avoid contactwith the rear axle control arms.

5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Putthe compact spare tire near you.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

6. Attach the lug wrench to thejack, and turn the wrenchclockwise to raise the jack head3 inches (7.6 cm).

7. Place the jack under the vehicleas identified in Step 4. Raise thevehicle by turning the lug wrenchclockwise in the jack. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so that there is enoughroom for the spare tire to fitunder the wheel well.

8. Remove all the wheel nuts andthe flat tire.

Vehicle Care 10-71

9. Remove the plastic spare tireheat shield by pulling the rubberlatch. Store the plastic spare tireheat shield. See “Storing a Flator Spare Tire and Tools” later inthis section for more information.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑56.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

10. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

11. Place the spare tire on thewheel mounting surface.

12. Put the nuts on by hand byturning them clockwise until thewheel is held against themounting surface. Make surethe rounded end is toward thewheel.

10-72 Vehicle Care

13. Lower the vehicle by attachingthe lug wrench to the jack andturning the wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts in

the proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton your vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

Storing the Spare Tire

{ WARNING

The underbody-mounted sparetire needs to be stored with thevalve stem pointing down. If thespare tire is stored with the valvestem pointing upwards, thesecondary latch will not workproperly and the spare tire couldloosen and suddenly fall from thevehicle. If this happened whenthe vehicle was being driven, thetire might contact a person oranother vehicle, causing injuryand damage to itself. Be sure theunderbody-mounted spare tire isstored with the valve stempointing down.

Vehicle Care 10-73

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the spare tire:

1. Lay the compact spare tire nearthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem down.

2. Reinstall the plastic spare tireheat shield on the compactspare tire.

3. Slide the cable retainer throughthe center of the wheel and startto raise the compact spare tire.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

4. When the compact spare tire isalmost in the stored position,turn the tire so the valve istoward the rear of the vehicle.

This position helps whenchecking the air pressure in thecompact spare tire.

5. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle.Continue turning the lug wrenchuntil you feel more than twoclicks. This indicates that thecompact spare tire is secure andthe cable is tight. The spare tirehoist cannot be overtightened.

6. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (A), and thentry to turn (B) the tire. If the tiremoves, use the lug wrench totighten the cable.

Storing the Flat Tire

1. Remove the cable package fromthe jack storage area.

2. Remove the small center cap bytapping the back of the cap withthe extension of the shaft, if thevehicle has aluminum wheels.

10-74 Vehicle Care

3. Put the flat tire in the rearstorage area with the valve stempointing toward the rear of thevehicle.

4. Pull the cable (A) through thedoor striker (E), the center of thewheel (D), and the plastic sparetire heat shield (C), as shown.

5. Hook the cable onto the outsideportion of the liftgate hinges (B).

6. Hook the other end of the cableonto the outside portion of theliftgate hinge on the other side ofthe vehicle.

7. Pull on the cable to make sure itis secure.

8. Make sure the metal tube iscentered at the striker. Push thetube toward the front of thevehicle.

9. Close the liftgate and make sureit is latched properly.

Vehicle Care 10-75

Storing the Tools

A. Tool Bag

B. Wing Bolt

C. Jack

Put back all tools as they werestored in the jack storagecompartment and put thecompartment cover back on.

1. Ensure that the bottom of thejack is facing toward you.

2. Turn the jack (C) on its side andplace down on the holdingbracket.

3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) byturning clockwise.

4. To replace the cover, line up thetab at the front of the cover withthe notch in the cover opening.Push the cover in place andmake sure that the rear clips arein the slots and push the coverclosed.

Store the center cap or the plasticbolt-on wheel covers until a full sizetire is put back on the vehicle. Whenyou replace the compact spare witha full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-onwheel covers or the center cap.Hand-tighten them over the wheelnuts, using the lug wrench.

Secondary Latch SystemThis vehicle has an underbodymounted tire hoist assembly thathas a secondary latch system. It isdesigned to stop the compact sparetire from suddenly falling off thevehicle if the cable holding thespare tire is damaged. For thesecondary latch to work, the tiremust be stowed with the valve stempointing down. See Tire Changingon page 10‑66 for instructions onstoring the spare tire correctly.

{ WARNING

Before beginning this procedureread all the instructions. Failure toread and follow the instructionscould damage the hoist assemblyand you and others could gethurt. Read and follow theinstructions listed next.

10-76 Vehicle Care

To release the spare tire from thesecondary latch:

{ WARNING

Someone standing too closeduring the procedure could beinjured by the jack. If the sparetire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one isbehind you or on either side ofyou as you pull the jack out fromunder the spare.

1. If the cable is not visible, startthis procedure at Step 3.

All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown

2. Turn the lug wrenchcounterclockwise untilapproximately 6 inches (15 cm)of cable is exposed.

3. Attach the lug wrench to the jackand raise the jack at least10 turns.

4. Place the jack under the vehicle,ahead of the rear bumper.Position the center lift point ofthe jack under the center of thespare tire.

5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise toraise the jack until it lifts thesecondary latch spring.

6. Keep raising the jack until thespare tire stops moving upwardand is held firmly in place. Thislets you know that the secondarylatch has released and the sparetire is balancing on the jack.

7. Lower the jack by turning the lugwrench counterclockwise. Keeplowering the jack until the sparetire slides off the jack.

Vehicle Care 10-77

8. Disconnect the lug wrench fromthe jack and carefully removethe jack. Use one hand to pushagainst the spare tire while firmlypulling the jack out from underthe spare tire with theother hand.

9. Tilt the retainer and slip itthrough the wheel opening whenthe spare tire has beencompletely lowered.

10. Turn the lug wrench clockwiseto raise the cable back up if thecable is hanging.

Have the hoist shaft assemblyinspected as soon as you can. Youwill not be able to store a spare tireusing the hoist assembly until it hasbeen repaired or replaced.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

The compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one, was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, however,it can lose air after a time. Checkthe inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soon aspossible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to performwell at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-sizetire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best toreplace the spare with a full-size tireas soon as possible. The spare tirewill last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

10-78 Vehicle Care

And do not mix the compact sparetire or wheel with other wheels ortires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.

The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) systemwill be automatically disabled whenyou use the compact spare. Torestore the AWD and preventexcessive wear on the clutch in yourAWD, replace the compact sparetire with a full-size tire as soon aspossible.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump StartingIf the vehicle's battery has rundown, you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle'ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. You

Vehicle Care 10-79

would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.If one of the vehicles is afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be surethe transfer case is not inNeutral.

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessories whenjump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on the othervehicle. Your vehicle has aremote positive (+) and a remotenegative (−) jump startingterminal. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more informationon the terminal locations.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the batteries haveenough water. You do not need toadd water to the ACDelco®

battery (or batteries) installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

10-80 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery.

Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part,or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

Vehicle Care 10-81

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least18 inches (45 cm) away from thedead battery, but not nearengine parts that move.

The electrical connection is justas good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

Your vehicle has a remotenegative (−) terminal for thispurpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

10-82 Vehicle Care

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

Towing

Towing the VehicleTo avoid damage, the disabledvehicle should be towed with all fourwheels off the ground. Consult yourdealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service if the disabledvehicle must be towed.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreationalpurposes — such as behind amotorhome, see RecreationalVehicle Towing following.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle towingare known as dinghy towing anddolly towing. Dinghy towing istowing the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground. Dolly towingis towing the vehicle with twowheels on the ground and twowheels up on a device known as adolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

Vehicle Care 10-83

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additional adviceand equipmentrecommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive, itcan be dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles may also be towedby putting the front wheels on adolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in thissection.

If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, itcan be dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles can also be towedby placing them on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of theground. These vehicles cannot betowed using a dolly.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components. Re-installthe fuse to start the vehicle.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle to be towed,shift the transmission toP (Park), and turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF.

2. Secure the vehicle to the towingvehicle.


4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

5. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

10-84 Vehicle Care

6. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove the 50 ampBATT1 fuse from the underhoodfuse block and store in a safelocation. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑30.

7. Release the parking brake.

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwithout performing each of thesteps listed under “DinghyTowing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged.Be sure to follow all steps of thedinghy towing procedure prior toand after towing the vehicle.

Notice: If 105 km/h (65mph) isexceeded while towing thevehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 105 km/h (65mph)while towing the vehicle.

Once the destination is reached:


2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuseto the underhood fuse block.

3. Shift the transmission toP (Park), turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF and remove the keyfrom the ignition.

4. Disconnect the vehicle from thetowing vehicle.

Notice: Do not tow a vehicle withthe front drive wheels on theground if one of the front tires isa compact spare tire. Towing withtwo different tire sizes on thefront of the vehicle can causesevere damage to thetransmission.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-DriveVehicles)

All-wheel-drive vehicles must not betowed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front.

Vehicle Care 10-85

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel-DriveVehicles Only)

To tow a front-wheel-drive vehiclefrom the front with two wheels onthe ground:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).


4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designed fortowing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.

10-86 Vehicle Care

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To keepthe paint finish looking new, keepthe vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Wash with water or usechrome polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A coating of wax,rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,keep it clean by washing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight and use a carwashing soap.

Vehicle Care 10-87

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that containacid or abrasives, as they candamage the paint, metal or plasticon the vehicle. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

High pressure car washes couldcause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 inches) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Notice: Conveyor systems onsome automatic car washes coulddamage the vehicle. There maynot be enough clearance for theundercarriage. Check with the carwash manager before using theautomatic car wash.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weather

frequent application may berequired. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

The vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a softclean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a softclean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium, calciumor sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the vehicle'schrome with soap and water afterexposure.

10-88 Vehicle Care

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chromepolish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only onchrome-plated wheels, but avoidany painted surface of the wheel,and buff off immediately afterapplication.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning the

blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Vehicle Care 10-89

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer/retailer.Larger areas of finish damage canbe corrected in your dealer's/retailer's body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer/retailer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shaped

discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareThe vehicle's interior will continue tolook its best if it is cleaned often.Dust and dirt can accumulate on theupholstery and cause damage tothe carpet, fabric, leather, andplastic surfaces. Stains should beremoved quickly as extreme heatcould cause them to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may requiremore frequent cleaning.Newspapers and garments that cantransfer color to home furnishingscan also transfer color to thevehicle's interior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brush withsoft bristles.

Your dealer/retailer has products forcleaning the vehicle's interior. Whencleaning the vehicle's interior, onlyuse cleaners specifically designed

10-90 Vehicle Care

for the surfaces that are beingcleaned. Permanent damage canresult from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Apply the cleaner directlyto the cleaning cloth to preventover-spray. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage to therear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Cleaners can contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in thevehicle's interior. Before usingcleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicle's interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicle's doors andwindows.

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:. Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage to the vehicle'sinterior surfaces.

. Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.Avoid laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) ofwater is a good guide.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

. Damage to the vehicle's interiormay result from the use of manyorganic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc.

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment to remove dustand loose dirt. A canister vacuumwith a beater bar in the nozzle mayonly be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils,always try to remove them first withplain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much ofthe soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

Vehicle Care 10-91

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub thesoiled area.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If the locallycleaned area gives any impressionthat a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

A paper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture from the fabric orcarpet after the cleaning process.

Leather

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat, steam,or spot lifters or spot removers,or shoe polish on leather. Manycommercial leather cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather maypermanently change theappearance and feel of the leatherand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing the glossin a non-uniform manner.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces. Manycommercial cleaners and coatingsthat are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces maypermanently change theappearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing the glossin a non-uniform manner.

10-92 Vehicle Care

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor MatsIf the floor mat has a snap retainer,a grommet in the driver side floormat attaches to a hook on the floorof the vehicle to secure the floormat. To remove the floor mat, pullthe mat towards the rear of thevehicle until the grommet can beremoved from the hook.

If the floor mat has a knob retainer,a grommet in the floor mat attachesto a knob on the floor of the vehicleto secure the floor mat. To removethe floor mat, turn the knob till it isaligned with the slot in the floor matgrommet and pull the floor mat up.To reinstall, center the slot in thefloor mat grommet with the knob onthe floor and set the mat in place.Then turn the knob until it isperpendicular to the slot in thegrommet to lock the mat in place.

Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-10

General InformationNotice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary to keepthis vehicle in good workingcondition. Damage caused byfailure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.

Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer/retailer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

. are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑39.

11-2 Service and Maintenance

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. SeeDoing Your Own Service Work onpage 10‑4.

At your General Motors dealer/retailer, you can be certain that youwill receive the highest level ofservice available. Your dealer/retailer has specially trained servicetechnicians, uses genuine GMreplacement parts, as well as, up todate tools and equipment to ensurefast and accurate diagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑9. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performedwhen they have 8 000 to 13 000 km(5,000 to 8,000 miles). See TireRotation on page 10‑48.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Engine OilSoon Message Displays

Change engine oil and filter.See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.An Emission Control Service.

When the Change Engine Oil Soonmessage displays, service isrequired for the vehicle as soon aspossible, within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life systemmight not indicate the need forvehicle service for more than a year.The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year andthe oil life system must be reset.Your dealer/retailer has trainedservice technicians who will performthis work and reset the system.


If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 miles sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

When the Change Engine Oil Soonmessage displays, certain services,checks, and inspections arerequired. The services describedfor Maintenance I should beperformed at every engine oilchange. The services describedfor Maintenance II should beperformed when:. Maintenance I was performed

the last time the engine oil waschanged.

. It has been 10 months or moresince the Change Engine OilSoon message has displayed orsince the last service.

Maintenance I. Change engine oil and filter.

See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.An Emission Control Service.

. Engine coolant level check. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑14.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑21.

. Tire inflation check. See TirePressure on page 10‑42.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑48.

. Rotate tires. See Tire Rotationon page 10‑48.

. Fluids visual leak check(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repaired and thefluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection (vehicles driven industy conditions only). SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑12.

. Brake system inspection(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

Maintenance II. Perform all services described in

Maintenance I.. Steering and suspension

inspection. Visual inspection fordamaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspectionof hoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑86. Worn ordamaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑26.


. Body hinges and latches, keylock cylinders, hood latchassemblies, secondary latches,pivots, spring anchor andrelease pawl, hood and doorhinges, rear folding seats, andliftgate hinges lubrication. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.More frequent lubricationmay be required when vehicleis exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth makes them lastlonger, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑30.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑12.

Additional Required Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑8.. Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 10‑14.. Windshield washer fluid level

check. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑21.

Once a Month. Tire inflation check. See Tire

Pressure on page 10‑42.. Tire wear inspection. See Tire

Inspection on page 10‑48.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 10‑25.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control SystemCheck on page 10‑25.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑25.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 10‑26.

. Engine cooling system andpressure cap pressure check.Radiator and air conditioningcondenser outside cleaning. SeeCooling System on page 10‑14.

. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. If the vehicle has a Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit, check thesealant expiration date printedon the instruction label of the kit.See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑58.


First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 40 000 km/25,000Miles. Fuel system inspection for

damage or leaks.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑12.

. Automatic transmission fluidchange (severe service) forvehicles mainly driven in heavycity traffic in hot weather, in hillyor mountainous terrain, whenfrequently towing a trailer,or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑11.

. All-wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (severeservice) for vehicles mainlydriven when frequently towing atrailer, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. During anymaintenance, if a power washer

is used to clean mud and dirtfrom the underbody, care shouldbe taken to not directly spraythe transfer case output seals.High pressure water canovercome the seals andcontaminate the transfer casefluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service). SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑11.

. Spark plug replacement andspark plug wires inspection.An Emission Control Service.

. All-wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (normalservice). During anymaintenance, if a power washeris used to clean mud and dirtfrom the underbody, care shouldbe taken to not directly spray thetransfer case output seals.

High pressure water canovercome the seals andcontaminate the transfer casefluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill, cooling systemand cap pressure check, andcleaning of outside of radiatorand air conditioning condenser(or every 5 years, whicheveroccurs first). See CoolingSystem on page 10‑14. AnEmission Control Service.

. Engine accessory drive beltinspection for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage andreplacement, if needed. AnEmission Control Service.


Service Maintenance IMaintenance

II

Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. • •

Engine coolant level check. • •

Windshield washer fluid level check. • •

Tire inflation pressures check. • •

Tire wear inspection. • •

Rotate tires. • •

Fluids visual leak check. • •

Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • •

Brake system inspection. • •

Steering and suspension inspection. •

Engine cooling system inspection. •

Windshield wiper blades inspection. •

Body components lubrication. •

Restraint system components check. •

Automatic transmission fluid level check. •

Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). •


Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, seeEngine Oil on page 10‑8.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑14.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, inCanada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering SystemGM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, inCanada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.


Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Carrier Assembly — Differential (RearDrive Module) and Transfer Case

(Power Transfer Unit)

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, CategoryLB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door Hinges and RearFolding Seat

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, inCanada 992887).


Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C

Engine Oil Filter 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107

Wiper Blades

Front Driver – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 15254805 —

Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in) 15254804 —

Rear – 30.0 cm (11.6 in) 25920067 —


Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date OdometerReading


Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Model designation. Paint information. Production options and special

equipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.

12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 for more information.

Application

Capacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.

Cooling System 10.8 L 11.4 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 5.2 L 5.5 qt

Fuel Tank 83.3 L 22.0 gal

Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill) 5.0 L 5.3 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑11 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.6L V6 Engine

12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES

Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-5GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-15Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-16Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the generalmanager.

13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer AssistanceRepresentative:. Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). This is available fromthe vehicle registration or title,or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two,you can file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line Program toenforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout of court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and your

case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.


STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,General Motors of Canada Limitedwants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, orcall the General Motors CustomerCommunication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customersto call the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States — CustomerAssistance

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)


From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada — CustomerAssistance

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7gmcanada.com

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas — CustomerAssistance

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands) — CustomerAssistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. deR.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY userin the U.S. can communicatewith Chevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial1-800-263-3830.)


Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more. Online service and maintenance

records. Find Chevrolet dealers for

service nationwide. Exclusive privileges and offers. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle. OnStar® and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries

Other Helpful Links:

Chevrolet − www.chevrolet.com

Chevrolet Merchandise —www.chevymall.com

Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter. FAQ. Contact Us

My GM Canada(Canada) — www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuabletools and services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers/Retailers: Savedetails such as address andphone number for each of yourpreferred GM dealers/retailers.

. My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values,or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canadasection within www.gm.ca.


GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program, available to qualifiedapplicants for cost reimbursementof eligible aftermarket adaptiveequipment required for your vehicle,such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift for thevehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer visit gmmobility.com or call theGM Mobility Assistance Center at1-800-323-9935. Text telephone(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S. purchased vehicles,call 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.


Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the rightto limit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service isprovided to unlock the vehicleif you are locked out. A remoteunlock may be available if youhave OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service isprovided to change a flat tirewith the spare tire. The sparetire, if equipped, must be in goodcondition and properly inflated.It is the owner's responsibility forthe repair or replacement of thetire if it is not covered by thewarranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service isprovided to jump start a deadbattery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting or

changing of snow tires, chains,or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.


Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.Additional travel information isalso available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometres from whereyour trip was started toqualify. General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help you make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may giveyou permission to get localemergency road service.You will receive payment, up to$100, after sending the originalreceipt to Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requireswarranty service, contact yourdealer/retailer and request anappointment. By scheduling aservice appointment and advisingyour service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer/retailer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please callyour dealership/retailer, let themknow this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requests you tobring the vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame day repair.


Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with the NewVehicle Limited Warranty (BaseWarranty Coverage period inCanada) and extended powertrain,and hybrid specific warranty in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several courtesy transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing your inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideyou with shuttle service to get youto your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule.This includes one-way or round tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofthe dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of thedealer's shuttle service, the expensemust be supported by originalreceipts and can only be up to themaximum amount allowed by GMfor shuttle service. In addition, forU.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend orrelative, limited reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may beavailable. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.See your dealer for informationregarding the allowance amountsfor reimbursement of fuel or othertransportation costs.


Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warrantyrepair. Rental reimbursement willbe limited and must be supportedby original receipts. This requiresthat you sign and complete arental agreement and meetstate/provincial, local, and rentalvehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike-vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the rightto unilaterally modify, change ordiscontinue Courtesy Transportationat any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms andconditions described hereinat its sole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, havethe damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle'sresale value, and safetyperformance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choiceto ensure that your vehicle'sdesigned appearance, durability,and safety are preserved. The useof Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New VehicleLimited Warranty.


Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart, may be an acceptable choiceto maintain your vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts arealso available. These are madeby companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for yourvehicle. As a result, these partsmay fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properly insubsequent collisions. Aftermarket

parts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, andany vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair Facility

We recommend that you choose acollision repair facility that meetsyour needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer/retailermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate of the art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your Vehicle

Protect your investment in yourGM vehicle with comprehensiveand collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences inthe quality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.

Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you assure yourvehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that assures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.


If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑6.

Gather the following information:. Driver's name, address, phone

number. Driver's license number. Owner's name, address, phone

number. Vehicle license plate. Vehicle make, model and

model year

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Insurance company and policynumber

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑38.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have apre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specifyto the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycled

original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered byyour GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Rememberif your vehicle is leased you maybe obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as cost stays within reasonablelimits.


Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on engines,transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering,body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of your vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The owner manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Current and Past Model OrderForms

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, specifyyear and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. on the World Wide Webat: helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: Alllisted prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Canadian residents are tomake checks payable in U.S. funds.


Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, in additionto notifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9


Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer/retailertechnician service your vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how you operate the vehicle,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayalso retain the owner’s personalpreferences, such as radio pre-sets,seat positions, and temperaturesettings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding howa vehicle's systems performed.The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling


This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehicle

manufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request of police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data anddeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link withany other GM system containingpersonal information.


Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with RSS-210/211 ofIndustry and Science Canada.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


2 NOTES

INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-45

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-12Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-38

Airbag System (cont.)When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-34AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-15Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7AntennaMulti-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-36

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Armrest Stoarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23, 7-29

Audio SystemRadio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-22Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Shiftlock Control SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-26Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-15Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, andStoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-39Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CDDVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-1Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-16CheckEngine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-25

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-55

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-62, 3-64Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52Where to Put the Restraint . . .3-54

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-77Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

INDEX i-3

Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Temperature Gage . . . .5-12Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

CoversCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-13

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-15Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22, 5-28

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-10Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

i-4 INDEX

Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

DVDRear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37

DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Check and Service EngineSoon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Engine (cont.)Coolant Temperature Gage . . .5-12Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Cooling System Messages . . .5-33Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-21Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-15Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFilterEngine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . .10-11Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . .3-10

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-40Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

INDEX i-5

Fuel (cont.)Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-39Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39Requirements, California . . . . .9-39System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Fuel EconomyDriving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

GGagesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Gages (cont.)Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-47Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17High Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

i-6 INDEX

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-35Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-36Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-16Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-61

Latch, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

LightingDelayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-20

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-21Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-13Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-20Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

INDEX i-7

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-16Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-36Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-33Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Messages (cont.)Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Object Detection System . . . . .5-35Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-36Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23, 7-29Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

NNavigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-47Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-5OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

i-8 INDEX

Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

PParade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6ParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-26

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-20Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-40Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-16Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-9

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-46

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-34Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

INDEX i-9

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-46Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-31Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-30

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated and VentilatedFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-6Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-75Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62, 3-64

i-10 INDEX

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-10Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-44

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Sidemarker and StoplampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-20Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-25Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo Management System . . . 4-3Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemRoof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

System CheckAutomatic TransmissionShiftlock Control . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

INDEX i-11

Tires (cont.)If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-44Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-43Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Secondary Latch System . . . 10-75Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-54When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-44Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-43Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-82Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Turn Signal,Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-32Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-47Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47

Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-65

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

i-12 INDEX

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Voltage Devices, andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Voltmeter Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

WWarning Lights, Gages, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-39

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Where to Put the ChildRestraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-26WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Wiring, High VoltageDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

2010 chevrolet traverse owner manual m · 2010 chevrolet traverse owner manual m in brief ... ce...

Documents